FM 355 - PID Control

Introduction
SIMATIC FM 355 closed-loop control module
1
______________
Product Overview
Information for the controller

2
SIMATIC ______________
adjustment
How Does the FM 355

3
______________
Control?
Installing and Removing the

FM 355 closed-loop control module 4
______________
FM 355
5
Operating Instructions ______________
Wiring the FM 355
Parameter Configuration of
6
______________
the FM 355
Implementing the FM 355 in

7
______________
the User Program
8
______________
Commissioning the FM 355
Properties of Digital and

9
______________
Analog Inputs and Outputs
Connecting Measuring
______________
10
Transducers and
Loads/Actuators
Assignment of the Instance

11
______________
DBs
12
______________
Faults and Diagnostics
13
______________
Examples
This manual is part of the documentation package A

with order no: 6ES7355-0VH00-8BA0 ______________
FB 29 and FB 30
B
______________
Data Sheet
C
Edition 02/2006
A5E00059344-03 ______________
Spare Parts
D
______________
References
Safety Guidelines
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
Danger
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
Warning
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
Caution
with a safety alert symbol, indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
Caution
without a safety alert symbol, indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
Notice
indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the corresponding information is not taken into
account.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The device/system may only be set up and used in conjunction with this documentation. Commissioning and
operation of a device/system may only be performed by qualified personnel. Within the context of the safety notes
in this documentation qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission, ground and
label devices, systems and circuits in accordance with established safety practices and standards.
Prescribed Usage
Note the following:
Warning
This device may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the technical description and only in
connection with devices or components from other manufacturers which have been approved or recommended
by Siemens. Correct, reliable operation of the product requires proper transport, storage, positioning and
assembly as well as careful operation and maintenance.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of the Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this
publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the
owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.
Siemens AG Order No.: A5E00059344-03 Copyright © Siemens AG 2006.

Automation and Drives Edition 02/2006 Technical data subject to change
Postfach 48 48
90437 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Introduction
Preface
Purpose of This Manual

This manual describes all the steps that are required to use the FM 355 function module. It
supports rapid and effective familiarization with the FM 355 functionality.
Contents of the Manual

This manual describes the hardware and software of the FM 355. It consists of an instruction
section and contains reference material (appendices.)
The following subjects are covered:
• Fundamentals of controlling
• Installing and removing the FM 355
• Wiring the FM 355
• Assigning parameters to the FM 355
• Programming the FM 355
• Appendixes
Target Group
This manual is intended for the following target groups:
• Fitters
• Programmers
• Commissioning engineers
• Service and maintenance personnel
Scope of This Manual

The present manual contains the description of function module FM 355 applicable at the
time the manual was published. We reserve the right to describe changes of FM 355
functionality in a Product Information leaflet.
FM 355 closed-loop control module

Operating Instructions, Edition 02/2006, A5E00059344-03 iii
Introduction
Approvals
The S7-300 has the following approvals:
UL Recognition Mark
Underwriters Laboratories (UL) in accordance with Standard UL 508
CSA-Certification-Mark
Canadian Standard Association (CSA) to Standard C 22.2 No. 142
FM approval complying with Factory Mutual Approval Standard Class Number 3611, Class I,
Division 2, Group A, B, C, D
Warning
Personal injury and material damage may be incurred.
In potentially explosive environments, there is a risk of injury or damage if you disconnect
any connectors while the S7-300 is in operation.
Always isolate the S7-300 operated in such areas before you disconnect and connectors.
Warning
WARNING - DO NOT DISCONNECT WHILE CIRCUIT IS LIVE UNLESS LOCATION IS
KNOWN TO BE NONHAZARDOUS
CE Marking
Our products fulfill the requirements of the EU Directive 89/336/EEC ”Electromagnetic
compatibility”.
The EU conformity certificates are available for the relevant authorities and are kept at the
following address in accordance with the above-mentioned EU Directive. Article 10:
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft
Bereich Automatisierungs- und Antriebstechnik
A&D AS RD ST PLC
Postfach 1963
D-92209 Amberg

iv Operating Instructions, Edition 02/2006, A5E00059344-03
Introduction
Position in the Information Landscape

This manual is a component of the S7-300 and ET 200M documentation.
System Documentation
S7-300 • S7-300 Automation systems
Structure, CPU Data
• S7-300, M7-300 Automation systems, Module specifications
• S7-300 Operation List
ET 200M • ET 200M Distributed I/O Device
• S7-300, M7-300 Automation systems, Module Specifications
Guide
The manual contains the following guides which provide quick access to the specific
information you need:
• At the beginning of the manual you can find a comprehensive list of contents.
• Following the appendices, you will find a glossary in which important technical terms used
in the manual are defined.
• The manual closes with a list of references and a detailed index for quick access to the
information you require.
Further Support
If you have any questions concerning the use of products which are not answered in this
manual, please contact your local Siemens partner at your Siemens office. A list of Siemens
representatives worldwide is contained, for example, in the appendix entitled "Siemens
Worldwide" of the manual "S7-300 Automation systems, Configuration of an S7-300.
We offer a range of courses to help get you started with the SIMATIC S7 programmable
controller. Please contact your local training center or the central training center in
Nuremberg, D-90327 Germany, Tel. +49 (0) 911 895 3200.

Operating Instructions, Edition 02/2006, A5E00059344-03 v
Introduction
Up-to-the-minute Information
The SIMATIC Customer Support offers you extensive additional information on the SIMATIC
products via the on-line services:
• You can obtain general current information:
– On the Internet at http://www.ad.siemens.de/simatic
• Current product information and downloads as an additional help:
– On the Internet at http://www.ad.siemens.de/simatic-cs
– Via the Bulletin Board System (BBS) in Nuremberg
(SIMATIC Customer Support Mailbox) under +49 (911) 895-7100.
To dial the mailbox, use a modem with up to V.34 (28.8 Kbps), with the following
parameter settings: 8, N, 1, ANSI, or dial via ISDN (x.75, 64 Kbps).
Nuremberg Johnson City Singapore

SIMATIC BASIC Hotline SIMATIC BASIC Hotline SIMATIC BASIC Hotline
Local time: M - F 7:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m. Local time: M - F 8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m. Local time: Mo.-Fr. 8:30 to 17:30
Phone: +49 (180) 5050-222 Phone: +1 423 461-2522 Phone: +65 740-7000
Fax: +49 (180) 5050-223 Fax: +1 423 461-2231 Fax: +65 740-7001
Email: techsupport@ Email: simatic.hotline@ Email: simatic.hotline@
ad.siemens.de sea.siemens.com sae.siemens.com.sg
GMT: +1:00 GMT: –5:00 GMT: +8:00
Nuremberg SIMATIC Premium Hotline
SIMATIC authorization hotline (fee based, only with SIMATIC Card)
Local time: M - F 7:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m. Time: Mon.-Fri. 0:00 to 24:00
Phone: +49 (911) 895-7200 Phone: +49 (911) 895-7777
Fax: +49 (911) 895-7201 Fax: +49 (911) 895-7001
Email: authorization@
nbgm.siemens.de
GMT: +1:00 GMT: +1:00
The languages of the SIMATIC Hotlines are generally German and English, in addition, French, Italian and Spanish are
spoken on the authorization hotline.

vi Operating Instructions, Edition 02/2006, A5E00059344-03
Table of contents
Introduction................................................................................................................................................ iii
1 Product Overview ................................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................ 1-1
1.2 Functionality of the FM 355........................................................................................................ 1-2
1.3 Areas of Application for the FM 355 .......................................................................................... 1-4
1.4 FM 355 Hardware ...................................................................................................................... 1-5
1.5 FM 355 Software........................................................................................................................ 1-8
2 Information for the controller adjustment................................................................................................. 2-1
2.1 Characteristic Values of the Controlled System ........................................................................ 2-1
2.2 Controller Types (Two-Step, Three-Step Controllers) ............................................................... 2-4
2.3 Control Response at Different Feedback Structures ................................................................. 2-7
2.4 Choosing the controller structure with a given control section ................................................ 2-14
2.5 Setting the Controller Characteristic Values (Optimization) .................................................... 2-16
2.6 Determining the System Parameters for Two-/Three-Step Controllers ................................... 2-18
2.7 Determining the System Parameters for Pure Cooling Controllers ......................................... 2-21
2.8 Establishing parameters by experiment................................................................................... 2-23
3 How Does the FM 355 Control?.............................................................................................................. 3-1
3.1 Basic Structure of the FM 355 ................................................................................................... 3-1
3.2 Basic Parameters....................................................................................................................... 3-4
3.3 FM 355 inputs ............................................................................................................................ 3-4
3.3.1 Analog inputs ............................................................................................................................. 3-5
3.3.2 Digital Inputs .............................................................................................................................. 3-7
3.4 Controller.................................................................................................................................... 3-8
3.5 Outputs of the FM 355 ............................................................................................................. 3-28
3.6 Functional mechanisms and data storage in the FM 355........................................................ 3-30
3.7 Characteristics of the FM 355 .................................................................................................. 3-35
3.8 Parameter optimization with temperature controllers .............................................................. 3-41
4 Installing and Removing the FM 355....................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1 Preparing for Installation ............................................................................................................ 4-1
4.2 Installing and Removing the FM 355 ......................................................................................... 4-3

Operating Instructions, Edition 02/2006, A5E00059344-03 vii
Table of contents
5 Wiring the FM 355 .................................................................................................................................. 5-1

5.1 Terminal assignment of the front connectors............................................................................. 5-1
5.2 Wiring front connectors .............................................................................................................. 5-8
5.3 Module Status After First Being Switched On.......................................................................... 5-10
6 Parameter Configuration of the FM 355.................................................................................................. 6-1
6.1 Installing the Parameterization Interface.................................................................................... 6-1
6.2 Configuring the hardware........................................................................................................... 6-2
6.3 Parameter assignment ............................................................................................................... 6-2
7 Implementing the FM 355 in the User Program ...................................................................................... 7-1
7.1 Summary .................................................................................................................................... 7-1
7.2 The function block PID_FM ........................................................................................................ 7-2
7.2.1 Operator Control via the PID_FM FB ......................................................................................... 7-3
7.2.2 Monitoring via the PID_FM FB ................................................................................................... 7-3
7.2.3 Changing Controller Parameters Using the PID_FM FB ........................................................... 7-5
7.2.4 Changing controller parameters via the OP............................................................................... 7-6
7.2.5 Saving the parameters in EEPROM .......................................................................................... 7-7
7.2.6 Relationship between FB parameters and the parameterization interface................................ 7-7
7.3 The FUZ_355 function block .................................................................................................... 7-14
7.4 The FORCE355 function block ................................................................................................ 7-16
7.5 The READ_355 function block ................................................................................................. 7-18
7.6 The CH_DIAG function block ................................................................................................... 7-20
7.7 The PID_PAR function block.................................................................................................... 7-23
7.8 The CJ_T_PAR Function Block................................................................................................ 7-29
7.9 PROFINET Operation .............................................................................................................. 7-31
8 Commissioning the FM 355 .................................................................................................................... 8-1
9 Properties of Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs .............................................................................. 9-1
9.1 Properties of the Digital Inputs and Outputs (Step Controllers)................................................. 9-1
9.2 Properties of the Analog Inputs.................................................................................................. 9-3
9.3 Properties of the Analog Outputs (Continuous-Action Controllers) ........................................... 9-6
10 Connecting Measuring Transducers and Loads/Actuators.................................................................... 10-1
10.1 Connecting Measuring Transducers to Analog Inputs............................................................. 10-1
10.2 Use of Thermocouples ............................................................................................................. 10-5
10.3 Connecting Voltage Sensors, Current Sensors and Resistance Thermometers................... 10-10
10.4 Connecting Loads/Actuators to Analog Outputs.................................................................... 10-13
10.5 Connecting Loads/Actuators to Digital Outputs ..................................................................... 10-15
11 Assignment of the Instance DBs........................................................................................................... 11-1
11.1 Instance DB of the PID_FM FB ................................................................................................ 11-1
11.2 Instance DB of the FUZ_355 FB ............................................................................................ 11-20
11.3 Instance DB of the FB FORCE355 ........................................................................................ 11-23

viii Operating Instructions, Edition 02/2006, A5E00059344-03
Table of contents
11.4 Instance DB of the READ_355 FB......................................................................................... 11-26

11.5 Instance DB of the CH_DIAG FB ........................................................................................... 11-28
11.6 Instance DB of the PID_PAR FB............................................................................................ 11-31
11.7 Instance DB of the CJ_T_PAR FB ......................................................................................... 11-33
11.8 Assignment of the DBs for Operator Control and Monitoring via OP .................................... 11-35
12 Faults and Diagnostics ......................................................................................................................... 12-1
12.1 Error display from the group error LED ................................................................................ 12-1
12.2 Triggering diagnostic interrupts................................................................................................ 12-2
12.3 Measuring transformer error .................................................................................................... 12-6
13 Examples.............................................................................................................................................. 13-1
13.1 Application example for the FM 355 S..................................................................................... 13-1
13.2 Application example for the FM 355 C..................................................................................... 13-6
13.3 Application Example for Diagnostics ..................................................................................... 13-10
13.4 Interconnection example for a cascade control ..................................................................... 13-11
13.5 Interconnection example for a ratio control............................................................................ 13-12
13.6 Interconnection example for a mixed control ......................................................................... 13-13
A FB 29 and FB 30.....................................................................................................................................A-1
A.1 The FB 29 "PID_PAR" function block ........................................................................................ A-1
A.2 Instance DB of the FB 29 .......................................................................................................... A-7
A.3 The FB 30 "CJ_T_PAR" function block .................................................................................... A-10
A.4 Instance DB of the FB 30 ........................................................................................................ A-12
A.5 List of RET_VALU messages................................................................................................... A-15
B Data Sheet..............................................................................................................................................B-1
B.1 Technical Specifications S7-300................................................................................................ B-1
B.2 Technical Specifications FM 355 ............................................................................................... B-3
B.3 Technical Specifications of Function Blocks.............................................................................. B-9
B.4 Technical Data of Parameter Configuration Interface.............................................................. B-10
C Spare Parts.............................................................................................................................................C-1
C.1 Spare Parts ................................................................................................................................C-1
D References .............................................................................................................................................D-1
D.1 References.................................................................................................................................D-1
Glossary ..................................................................................................................................... Glossary-1
Index................................................................................................................................................ Index-1

Operating Instructions, Edition 02/2006, A5E00059344-03 ix
Table of contents
Tables
Table 1-1 Inputs and outputs of the the FM 355 ........................................................................................ 1-3
Table 1-2 Diagnostics and Status LED's.................................................................................................... 1-7
Table 2-1 Suitable Controller for the Most Important Control Variables .................................................. 2-15
Table 3-1 Signal selection for setpoint value, D-action input and disturbance variable........................... 3-13
Table 3-2 Functions of the controller output and setting possibilities ...................................................... 3-26
Table 3-3 Assignment and meaning of the digital outputs ....................................................................... 3-29
Table 3-4 Conversion time of an analog input ......................................................................................... 3-36
Table 3-5 Rules for the conversion time .................................................................................................. 3-36
Table 5-1 Terminal assignment of the front connectors of the FM 355 C.................................................. 5-2
Table 5-2 Terminal assignment of the front connectors of the FM 355 S .................................................. 5-4
Table 7-1 List of the REAL and INT parameters that can be changed with the PID_PAR FB................. 7-25
Table 7-2 List of the CPUs, in which the PID_PAR FB can be used ....................................................... 7-28
Table 11-1 Input parameters of the instance DB for the PID_FM FB ........................................................ 11-2
Table 11-2 Output parameters of the instance DB for the PID_FM FB...................................................... 11-3
Table 11-3 I/O parameters of the instance DB for the PID_FM FB.......................................................... 11-11
Table 11-4 Input parameters of the instance DB for the FUZ_355 FB..................................................... 11-21
Table 11-5 Output parameters of the instance DB for the FUZ_355 FB.................................................. 11-21
Table 11-6 Input parameters of the instance DB for the FORCE355 FB................................................. 11-23
Table 11-7 Output parameters of the instance DB to the FB FORCE355 ............................................... 11-25
Table 11-8 Input parameters of the instance DB for the READ_355 FB.................................................. 11-26
Table 11-9 Output parameters of the instance DB for the READ_355 FB............................................... 11-26
Table 11-10 Input parameters of the instance DB for the CH_DIAG FB.................................................... 11-28
Table 11-11 Output parameters of the instance DB for the CH_DIAG FB................................................. 11-30
Table 11-12 Input parameters of the instance DB for the PID_PAR FB .................................................... 11-31
Table 11-13 Output parameters of the instance DB for the PID_PAR FB ................................................. 11-32
Table 11-14 Input parameters of the instance DB for the CJ_T_PAR FB.................................................. 11-33
Table 11-15 Output parameters of the instance DB for the CJ_T_PAR FB ............................................... 11-34
Table 11-16 Input parameters of the DBs for operator control and monitoring.......................................... 11-35
Table 11-17 Output parameters of the DBs for operator control and monitoring....................................... 11-43
Table 11-18 I/O parameters of the DBs for operator control and monitoring............................................. 11-51
Table 12-1 Assignments of diagnostics record DS0 .................................................................................. 12-3
Table 12-2 Assignment of Bytes 4 to 12 of the diagnostics record DS1.................................................... 12-4
Table 13-1 Blocks of Example 1................................................................................................................. 13-3
Table 13-2 Blocks of Example 2................................................................................................................. 13-7
Table A-1 List of the REAL and INT parameters that can be changed with the "PID_PAR" FB ................A-3
Table A-2 Input parameters of the instance DB for the FB 29 "'PID_PAR" ................................................A-7

x Operating Instructions, Edition 02/2006, A5E00059344-03
Table of contents
Table A-3 Input parameters of the instance DB for the FB 29 "'PID_PAR"................................................ A-8
Table A-4 Through parameters of the instance DB for the FB 29 "'PID_PAR" .......................................... A-9
Table A-5 Input parameters of the instance DB for the FB 30 "CJ_T_PAR" ............................................ A-12
Table A-6 Output parameters of the instance DB for the FB 30 "CJ_T_PAR" ......................................... A-13
Table A-7 Through parameters of the instance DB for the FB 30 "CJ_T_PAR"....................................... A-14
Table B-1 Technical specifications of the function blocks .......................................................................... B-9
Table B-2 Processing times of the PID_FM at various conditions.............................................................. B-9
Table B-3 Technical specifications of the instance DBs............................................................................. B-9
Table C-1 Accessories and spare parts......................................................................................................C-1

Operating Instructions, Edition 02/2006, A5E00059344-03 xi
Table of contents

xii Operating Instructions, Edition 02/2006, A5E00059344-03
Product Overview 1
1.1 1.1 Introduction
Variants of the FM 355

The FM 355 is available in the following 2 variants:
• Continuous-action controller with analog outputs
• S controller (step and pulse controllers with digital outputs)
Order Numbers
Product Scope of delivery Order Number

FM 355 C • FM 355 C module, version ≥ 6 (continuous 6ES7355-0VH10-0AE0
controller)
• CD with configuration package, manual and
Getting Started
FM 355 S • FM 355 S module, version ≥ 6 (step and pulse 6ES7355-1VH10-0AE0
controller)
• CD with configuration package, manual and
Getting Started

Operating Instructions, Edition 02/2006, A5E00059344-03 1-1
Product Overview
1.2 Functionality of the FM 355
1.2 1.2 Functionality of the FM 355
Introduction
The FM 355 function module is a controller module for use in the S7-300 Automation
systems.
Control Method
Two different control methods are implemented in the FM 355. Support in optimizing the
control system is available for both control methods:
Control method Optimization by ...

Temperature controller (fuzzy controller) ... The module (self-tuning controller)
PID controller ... Parameter assignment interface or PID Self Tuner
Control Structures
You can use the FM 355 for the following control structures:
• Set-value control
• Follower control
• 3-component control
• Cascade control
• Ratio control
• Mix control
• Split-range control
Operating modes
The FM 355 can operate in the following modes:
• Automatic
• Manual
• Safety mode
• Follow-up control mode (changeover to preset safety value)
• Specification of the manipulated value DDC (Direct Digital Control)
• Follow-up/SPC controller (SPC = Set Point Control)
• Back-up mode (at CPU in STOP or CPU failure)

1-2 Operating Instructions, Edition 02/2006, A5E00059344-03
Product Overview
1.2 Functionality of the FM 355
Number of Channels
The FM 355 contains 4 controllers operating independently of each other in 4 channels.
Number of Inputs and Outputs

The following table provides an overview of the number of inputs and outputs of the FM 355.
Table 1-1 Inputs and outputs of the the FM 355
Inputs/Outputs FM 355 C FM 355 S

Analog inputs 4 4
Digital inputs 8 8
Analog outputs 4 -
Digital outputs - 8
Diagnostics Interrupt
The FM 355 can trigger a diagnostics interrupt if any of the following occur:
• Error in module parameterization
• Module defective
• Overflow and underflow at analog inputs
• Load break and short circuit at analog outputs
Hardware Interrupts
Hardware interrupts are not required for FM 355 operation.
Reference Junction
For operation with thermocouples the FM 355 has an additional analog input for connecting
a Pt100 in 4-wire design. This input is used to measure the reference junction temperature
and thus to carry out compensation at thermocouples.
Parameterization
The FM 355 can be parameterized by means of a parameter configuration interface.

Product Overview
1.3 Areas of Application for the FM 355
1.3 1.3 Areas of Application for the FM 355
Where Can You Use the FM 355?

The FM 355 is a universally applicable controller module for the following control tasks:
• Temperature control
• Level control
• Filling level control
• Pressure control
• Flow control
• Concentration control
Applications
The FM 355 is usually used to carry out control tasks in the following branches:
• General machine construction
• Plant construction
• Industrial furnace construction
• Cooling and heating unit construction
• Food and beverage industry
• Process engineering
• Environmental technology
• Glass and ceramics manufacturing
• Rubber and plastics machines
• Woodworking and paper industry

Product Overview
1.4 FM 355 Hardware
1.4 1.4 FM 355 Hardware
Module View
The following figure shows the FM 355 module with front connectors and the bus connector
at closed front doors.

;

Figure 1-1 FM 355 module view
① Front connector with front connector coding

② Type plate
③ SIMATIC interface bus connector
④ Version
⑤ Order Number
⑥ Labeling strips
⑦ LEDs

Product Overview
1.4 FM 355 Hardware
Front Connectors
The FM 355 offers the following connection possibilities via the front connectors:
• 8 digital inputs
• 4 analog inputs
• 1 reference junction input
• 8 digital outputs (only step controllers)
• 4 analog outputs (only continuous-action controllers)
• Supply voltage 24 V DC between L+ and M to supply the module and the digital and
analog outputs
• Reference point of the analog circuit MANA
The front connectors must be ordered separately (refer to the "Spare Parts" appendix).
Front Connector Coding

When you press a front connector from the wiring position to the operating position, the front
connector coding engages. Thereafter, this front connector can only be attached to an FM
355 module.
Labeling strips
Enclosed with the module are two labeling strip on which you can write your signal names
individually.
The corresponding pin assignments are printed on the insides of the front panel.
Order Number and Version

The order number and the version of the FM 355 are given at the bottom of the left-hand
front panel.
Bus Connectors
The communication within a row of the S7 300 takes place via the bus connector. The bus
connector is enclosed with the FM 355.

Product Overview
1.4 FM 355 Hardware
Diagnostics and Status LED's

The FM 355 has ten LEDs that can be used both for diagnostics and for indicating the status
of the FM 355 and its digital inputs.
The following table lists the LEDs with their labeling, color and function.
Table 1-2 Diagnostics and Status LED's
Labeling Color Function

SF red Group error
Backup Yellow Display of the backup mode
I1 Green Status of Digital Input I1
The LEDs next to the binary outputs of the FM 355 S are not controlled and do not have any
meaning.

Product Overview
1.5 FM 355 Software
1.5 1.5 FM 355 Software
Software Package of the FM 355

In order to integrate the FM 355 in the S7-300 you require a software package with:
• Parameter configuration interface
• Software for the CPU (function blocks)
Parameter Configuration Interface

The FM 355 is adapted to the task in hand via parameters. These parameters are stored in
the system data and are transferred in the CPU STOP state from the programming
device/PC to the CPU and to the FM 355. In addition the CPU transfers these parameters to
the module during every transition from STOP to RUN.
You can specify the parameters via the parameter configuration interface. The parameter
configuration interface is installed on your programming device/PC and called up within
STEP 7.
Online Help
Further information about the parameter configuration is available in the integrated online
help.
Software for the S7-300 CPU (Function Blocks)

The software for the CPU consists of the function blocks:
• PID_FM for modifying parameters and operating modes (e.g. setpoint, manual to
automatic changeover) during running operation and to read out process states (e.g.
actual value).
• FORCE355 for forcing analog and digital inputs during commissioning (forcing = specify
simulation values).
• READ_355 for reading out the analog and digital input values during commissioning.
• CH_DIAG for reading out channel-specific diagnostic values during commissioning.
• FUZ_355 for reading out the parameters of the self-tuning temperature controller (fuzzy
controller) for loading these parameters to the FM 355 (e.g. at a module replacement
without renewed parameter identification of the controller).
• PID_PAR for special applications for changing further parameters during running
operation.

Product Overview
1.5 FM 355 Software
The following figure shows an S7-300 configuration with an FM 355 and several signal
modules.
Figure 1-2 SIMATIC S7-300 configuration with an FM 355
① Programming device (PG) with STEP 7 and the parameter configuration masks
② FM 355
③ CPU with application program and FBs of the FM 355

Product Overview
1.5 FM 355 Software

Information for the controller adjustment 2
2.1 2.1 Characteristic Values of the Controlled System
Determining the Time Response from the Step Response

Time response of the controlled system can be determined by the time sequence of
Controlled variable x after an abrupt change of Manipulated variable y from 0 to 100%.

<K
; PD[
.V

<K

Information for the controller adjustment
2.1 Characteristic Values of the Controlled System
7J
; PD[
;K
ෙ[
.V
ෙW
7X W
Figure 2-1 Step response of a controlled system
① 100% ON
② 0% OFF
Most of the controlled systems are so-called controlled systems with self-regulation (refer to
the figure above).
The time response can be determined by approximation using the variables Delay time Tu,
Recovery time Tg and Maximum value Xmax. The variables are determined by applying
tangents to the maximum value and the inflection point of the step response. Recording the
transition function up to the maximum value is not possible in many cases because the
controlled variable may not exceed certain values. The rate of rise vmax is therefore used for
the controlled system.
From the ratio
Tu / Tg or Tu x vmax / Xmax
it is possible to estimate the suitability of the controlled system for controlling. The following
applies:
Tu / T g Suitability of the controlled system for controlling

< 0,1 can be controlled well
0.1 to 0.3 can still be controlled
> 0,3 difficult to control
Controlled systems can be judged on the basis of the following values:
Tu < 0.5 min, Tg < 5 min = fast controlled system
Tu > 0.5 min, Tg > 5 min = slow controlled system

2.1 Characteristic Values of the Controlled System
Characteristic values of important temperature controlled systems
Controlled Type of controlled system Delay time Tu Recovery time Tg Rate of rise vmax
variable
Temperature Small electrically heated furnace 0.5 to 1 min 5 to 15 min Up to 60 K/min.
Large electrically heated annealing 1 to 5 min 10 to 20 min Up to 20 K/min.
furnace
Large gas-heated annealing furnace 0.2 to 5 min 3 to 60 min 1 to 30 K/min
Autoclaves 0.5 to 0.7 min 10 to 20 min
High-pressure autoclaves 12 to 15 min 200 to 300 min
Injection molding machines 0.5 to 3 min 3 to 30 min 5 to 20 K/min
Extruders 1 to 6 min 5 to 60 min
Packaging machines 0.5 to 4 min 3 to 40 min 2 to 35 K/min

2.2 Controller Types (Two-Step, Three-Step Controllers)
2.2 2.2 Controller Types (Two-Step, Three-Step Controllers)
Two-Step Controllers Without Feedback

Two-step controllers have the state "ON" and "OFF" as the switching function. This
corresponds to 100% or 0% output. Through this behavior a sustained oscillation of
Controlled variable x occurs around Setpoint value w.
The amplitude and the oscillation duration increases with the ratio of the Delay time Tu to the
Recovery time Tg of the controlled system. These controllers are used mainly for simple
temperature control systems (such as electrically directly heated furnaces) or as limit-value
signaling units.
<K
Z [
Figure 2-2 Characteristic curve of a two-step controller
① ON
② OFF
Yh Position range
w Reference value

[ 7J
; 6G
7X W

W
Figure 2-3 Control function of a two-step controller without feedback
① Transition function without controller

Tu Delay time
Tg Recovery time
XSd Switching difference
Two-Step Controllers With Feedback

The behavior of two-step controllers at controlled systems with high delay times, e.g.
furnaces at which the utilization room is separated from the heating, can be improved
through electronic feedbacks.
The feedback is used to increase the switching frequency of the controller, thus reducing the
amplitude of the controlled variable. In addition, the control-action results can be improved
substantially in dynamic operation. The limit for the switching frequency is set by the output
level. It should not exceed 1 to 5 switches per minute at mechanical actuators, such as
relays and contactors. In the case of voltage and current outputs with downstream thyristor
or Triac controllers high switching frequencies can be selected that exceed the limit
frequency of the controlled system by far.

Since the switching pulses can no longer be determined at the output of the controlled
system, results comparable with those of continuous controllers are obtained.
In contrast to a continuous controller, at which the amplitude of the output signal represents
the manipulated variable, the output variable is formed at a two-step controller with feedback
through pulse width modulation.
Two-step controllers with feedback are used for temperature control in furnaces, at
processing machines in the plastics, textile, paper, rubber and foodstuff industries as well as
for heating and cooling devices.
Three-Step Controllers
Three-step controllers are used for heating/cooling. These controllers have 2 switching
points as their output. The control-action results are optimized through electronic feedback
structures. Fields of applications for such controllers are heating, low-temperature, climatic
chambers and tool heating units for plastic-processing machines.
\
\ \
\
Z [
[ 6K
Figure 2-4 Characteristic curve of a three-step controller
y Manipulated variable, e.g.

y11 = 100% heating
y12 = 0% heating
y21 = 0% cooling
y22 = 100% cooling
x Controlled variable, e.g. temperature in °C
w Setpoint
xSh Distance between Switching Point 1 and Switching Point 2

2.3 Control Response at Different Feedback Structures
2.3 2.3 Control Response at Different Feedback Structures
Control Behavior of Controllers

In order to achieve the precision of a control system and optimal disturbance correction an
adaptation of the controller to the time response of the controlled system is required.
Feedback structures are used to this purpose. Depending on the feedback circuit structure
this can have a proportional action (P), proportional-derivative action (PD), proportional-
integral action (PI) or proportional-integral-derivative action (PID). If a jump function to the
controller input exists, jump responses arise under the condition that the delay times of the
controller are negligibly small and that the controller reacts very rapidly.
P-action Controller
6WHSIXQFWLRQRQWKH
FRQWUROOHULQSXW
,QSXWYDULDEOH
W
6WHSUHVSRQVHRIWKH
FRQWLQXRXVFRQWUROOHU
2XWSXWYDULDEOH W

6WHSUHVSRQVHRIWKH
SXOVHFRQWUROOHU

2XWSXWYDULDEOH W
Figure 2-5 The jump response of a P-action controller

Equation for P-action controller

Output variable and input variable are directly proportional, meaning:
Output variable change = Proportional-action gain x Input variable change, or
y = GAIN x xw
PD-action controller
6WHSIXQFWLRQRQWKH
FRQWUROOHULQSXW
,QSXWYDULDEOH W
6WHSUHVSRQVHRIWKH
70B/$*
2XWSXWYDULDEOH
W
\

6WHSUHVSRQVHRIWKH
SXOVHFRQWUROOHU

2XWSXWYDULDEOH W
Figure 2-6 Jump response of a PD-action controller
D-action control elements are not suitable on their for controlling, since they no longer emit
an actuating command when the input variable has settled back to a static value.
In combination with P-action control elements the derivative component is used to generate
a corresponding control pulse depending on the change speed of the controlled variable

If a Disturbance x acts on the controlled system, the PD-action controller sets a different
system deviation due to the changed degree of correction. Disturbances are not corrected
completely. The good dynamic response is advantageous. A well attenuated, non-oscillating
transition is achieved during starting up and the reference input variable. However, a
controller with D-action is not appropriate if a controlled system has pulsing measured
quantities, for example at pressure or flow control systems.
Equation for PD-action controller
The following applies for the jump response of the PD-action controller in the time range:
ದW
7' 70B/$*
\ *$,1[ Z H
70B/$*
t = Duration since the jump of the input variable

PI-action Controller
6WHSIXQFWLRQRQWKH
FRQWUROOHULQSXW
,QSXWYDULDEOH
W
6WHSUHVSRQVHRIWKH
2XWSXWYDULDEOH
W

6WHSUHVSRQVHRIWKH
SXOVHFRQWUROOHU

2XWSXWYDULDEOH W
Figure 2-7 Jump response of a PI-action controller
I-action control elements have the integral of the input variable as the output variable, i.e. the
controller totals the deviation from the setpoint value for the duration. This means that the
controller continues to adjust until the deviation from the setpoint value has been eliminated.
In practical experience a combination of the various timing elements is ideal, depending on
the requirements placed on the control response. The time response of the individual
elements can be described by the controller parameters Proportional band GAIN, Reset time
TI (I-action) and Differential-action time TD (D-action).

Equation for PI-action controller

The following applies for the jump response of the PI-action controller in the time range:

\ *$,1[ Z
7, W

PID-action Controller
[
6WHSIXQFWLRQRQWKH
FRQWUROOHULQSXW
,QSXWYDULDEOH W
70B/$* 6WHSUHVSRQVHRIWKH
2XWSXWYDULDEOH
W
0Q
6WHSUHVSRQVHRIWKH
SXOVHFRQWUROOHU
2XWSXWYDULDEOH W
Figure 2-8 Jump response of a PID-action controller

Most of the controller systems occurring in process engineering can be controlled by means
of a controller with PI-action response. In case of slow controlled systems with a high delay
time, for example temperature control systems, the control-action results can be improved by
a controller with PID action.

8QLWVWHSUHVSRQVH
ZLWKRXWFRQWUROOHU
3,'
3'

W
Figure 2-9 Jump response at various control responses
Controllers with PI and PID action have the advantage that the controlled variable does not
have any deviation from the setpoint value after settling. The controlled variable oscillates
over the setpoint value during starting up.
Equation for PID-action controller
The following applies for the jump response of the PI-action controller in the time range:
ದW
7' 70B/$*
\ *$,1[ Z H
7, W 70B/$*

2.4 Choosing the controller structure with a given control section
2.4 2.4 Choosing the controller structure with a given control section
Selection of the Suitable Controller Structures

Amongst the closed-control elements the controlled systems have a special position. Their
properties are determined by the process-specific applications and cannot be changed
afterwards. An optimal control-action result can thus only be achieved by the selection of a
suitable controller whose response can be adapted to the system data within certain limits.
Controlled system Controller structure

P PD PI PID
Pure dead time Unusable Unusable Control Unusable
+ disturbance
Dead time Unusable Unusable Slightly worse Control

+ first-order than PID + disturbance
time-delay
Dead time Not suitable Bad Worse than PID Control

+ second-order + disturbance
time-delay
Order Control Control at delay Disturbance Disturbance at

+ very small dead time time delay time
(delay time)
Higher order Not suitable Not suitable Slightly worse Control

than PID + disturbance
Not self-regulating Control (without Control (with delay) Control (without Control (with
delay) delay) delay)

2.4 Choosing the controller structure with a given control section
Table 2-1 Suitable Controller for the Most Important Control Variables
Controller P PD PI PID
Controlled variable Steady-state control deviation No steady-state control deviation
Temperature for less demands Well suited The most suitable controller types for
and with P high-quality requirements (except for
sections with Tu / specially adapted special controllers)
Tg < 0.1
Pressure Suitable, if the Unsuitable The most suitable controller types for
delay time is high-quality requirements (except for
inconsiderable specially adapted special controllers)
Flow rate If suitable, Unsuitable Suitable, but I- Hardly required for
because required action controller these control
GAIN range alone often better variables
usually too large

2.5 Setting the Controller Characteristic Values (Optimization)
2.5 2.5 Setting the Controller Characteristic Values (Optimization)
Rule of Thumb for the Parameter Setting
Controller structure Setting

P GAIN ≈ vmax x Tu [ °C ]
PI GAIN ≈ 1.2 x vmax x Tu [ °C ]
PD GAIN ≈ 0.83 x vmax x Tu [ °C ]
TD ≈ 0.25 x vmax x Tu [ min ]
TM_LAG ≈ 0.5 x TD[ min ]
PID GAIN ≈ 0.83 x vmax x Tu [ °C ]
TI ≈ 2 x Tu [ min ]
TD ≈ 0.4 x Tu [ min ]
PD/PID GAIN ≈ 0.4 x vmax x Tu [ °C ]
TI ≈ 2 x Tu [ min ]
TD ≈ 0.4 x Tu [ min ]
Instead of Vmax = ∆x / ∆t you can use Xmax / Tg.
In the case of controllers with PID structure the setting of the reset time and differential-
action time is usually coupled with each other.
The ratio TI / TD lies between 4 and 5 and is optimal for most control systems.
Non-observance of the differential-action time TD is uncritical at PD controllers.
In the case of PI and PID controllers, control oscillations occur if the reset time TI has been
select by more than half too small.
A reset time that is too large slows down the settling times of disturbances. One cannot
expect that the control loops operate "optimally" after the first parameter settings. Experience
shows that adjusting is always necessary, when a system exists that is "difficult to control"
with Tu / Tg > 0.3.

2.5 Setting the Controller Characteristic Values (Optimization)
Feedbacks and Controlled Systems
Controlled Type of controlled system Tu or Tt1 Tg or Ts 2 Vmax. = Δx / Δt

variable
Temperature Small electrically heated 0.5 to 1 min 5 to 15 min 1 °C/s
furnace
Large electrically heated 1 to 5 min 10 to 60 min 0.3 °C/s
annealing furnace
Large gas-heated 0.2 to 5 min 3 to 60 min
annealing furnace
Distillation tower 1 to 7 min 40 to 60 min 0.1 to 0.5 °C/s
Autoclave (2.5 m 3) 0.5 to 0.7 min 10 to 20 min
High-pressure autoclave 12 to 15 min 200 to 230 min
(1000°C, 40 bar)
Steam superheater 30 s to 2.5 min 1 to 4 min 2°C/s
Room heating 1 to 5 min 10 to 60 min 1°C/min.
Flow rate Pipeline with gas 0 to 5 s 0.2 to 10 s –
Pipeline with liquid 0 0
Pressure Gas pipeline 0 0.1 s –
Drum boiler with gas or oil 0 150 s –
firing
Drum boiler with impact 1 to 2 min 2 to 5 min –
grinding mills
Vessel level Drum boiler 0.6 to 1 min – 0.1 to 0.3 cm/s
Speed Small electric drive 0 0.2 to 10 s –
Large electric drive 0 5 to 40 s –
Steam turbine 0 – 50 min–1
Voltage Small generators 0 1 to 5 s –
Large generators 0 5 to 10 s –
1 Tt = Dead time
2 TS = section constants

2.6 Determining the System Parameters for Two-/Three-Step Controllers
2.6 2.6 Determining the System Parameters for Two-/Three-Step Controllers
Procedure
You can record the heating and cooling behavior of the temperature controlled systems by
means of a recording unit (see figure below). To do this, proceed as follows:
1. Specify the programming device manipulated value 0 via the loop monitor.
2. Configure the controller as a PI controller.
3. Enter uncritical control parameters via the parameter configuration interface or the
PID_FM FB:
GAIN = 1.0
TI, TD = 0.0
4. Load the parameters to the module.
5. Switch to the manipulated value controller via the loop monitor.
6. Enter the setpoint temperature (1).
The module switches on the heating.
7. Wait until the process value has "settled" (2).
Remark: The setpoint value does not have to be reached.
8. Specify the setpoint temperature 0 °C. (3).
The module switches on the cooling.
Remark: Steps 7 and 8 are only required at three-step controllers.

, .
7HPSHUDWXUH 6HWWHPSHUDWXUH
09
, +
6WDUWWHPSHUDWXUH
09
+HDWLQJXSFXUYH &RROLQJGRZQFXUYH 7LPH
Figure 2-10 Determined heating and cooling curve
You can then determine the following parameters from the curve:
TU = Delay time (in s)
SK = Maximum ascent of the cooling curve (in °C/s)
SK = Maximum ascent of the heating curve (in °C/s)

Determining the Controller Parameters
The sampling time

TA is determined by the conversion time of the FM 355. You can read off the
a) TA [ms] =
TA in the parameter configuration interface:
Button: Module parameters
>r&@
b) GAIN = 7$ >PV@
6+ r& 78 >V@
V PV

V
7$ >PV@
V
c) TI[s] = 78 >V@
PV V
V
7$ >PV@
78 >V@
d) TD[s] = PV
V
In addition at three-step controllers:

e) LMN_LLM = 6.
r&
V
ದ>@
r&
6+
V
LMN_LLM is a parameter of the PID_FM FB. It specifies the lower limit of the controller.
You can set this value at the "Lower" parameter in the Limit manipulated value controller
mask of the parameter configuration interface.
You have to set the same value at the "Start of range input signal" parameter of manipulated
value B in the Split-range controller mask.
The two settings have to agree so that the input value of the split-range function of the
controller can take on values from the full setting range of the slit-range function.

Example
Manipulated 0% up to 100 % Corresponds to heating

variable
Manipulated - 100 % up to 0% Corresponds to cooling
variable
Set the parameters of the split-range function as follows for this example:
• Manipulated value A:
– Start of range input signal = 0
– End of range input signal = 100
– Start of range output signal = 0
– End of range output signal = 100
• Manipulated value B:
– Start of range input signal = -100
– End of range input signal = 0
– Start of range output signal = 100
– End of range output signal = 0

2.7 Determining the System Parameters for Pure Cooling Controllers
2.7 2.7 Determining the System Parameters for Pure Cooling Controllers
Procedure
You can record the cooling-down behavior of the temperature controlled system by means of
a recording unit (see figure below).
To do this, proceed as follows:
1. Enter uncritical control parameters:
GAIN = 1.0
TI, TD = 0.0
2. Set the manipulated value to manual operation
3. Specify the manipulated value 0 via the loop monitor.
4. Let the temperature "settle" to the operating temperature by feeding external heating
energy (for example through adjacent heating zones).
5. Specify the setpoint temperature 0°C via the loop monitor (1).
6. Set the manipulated value to controller operation.
→ The module switches on the cooling.
Note
During the cooling-down process the external heating energy supply must remain
constant. For example, the adjacent heating zones have to be heated with a constant
manipulated variable.

7HPSHUDWXUH , .
0DQI
09 09
&RROLQJGRZQFXUYH
, .
7LPH
Figure 2-11 Determined cooling-down curve

2.7 Determining the System Parameters for Pure Cooling Controllers
• You can then determine the following parameters from the curve:
TU = Delay time (in s)
SK = Maximum ascent of the cooling curve (in °C/s)
Tini = Initial temperature (in °C)
• In addition, the temperature TCool (in °C) of the cooling medium has to be determined.
Determining the controller parameters
The sampling time

TA is determined by the conversion time of the FM 355. You can read off
a) TA [ms] =
the
TA in the parameter configuration interface: Button: Module parameters
>r&@
b) GAIN of r&
r&ದ7
.+/
>r&@ 7$ >PV@
200°C = 6. V 78 >V@
7 >r&@ದ7.+/>r&@ PV
DQI
V
7$ >PV@
V
c) TN[s] = 78 >V@
PV V

V
7$ >PV@
d) TD[s] = 78 >V@
PV

V

2.8 Establishing parameters by experiment
2.8 2.8 Establishing parameters by experiment
Procedure
As an alternative to calculating the parameters you can establish the control parameters by
means of targeted experimentation:
6WDUWSRLQW*$,1VPDOO 7'RUVPDOO7, 7' PHDQV3DWKLV

VZLWFKHGRII
([FLWDWLRQ 2QDFFRXQWRIDMXPSOLNH
VHWSRLQWFKDQJH
*$,1
3RRUDWWHQXDWLRQ" \HV
&RQWUROOHURVFLOODWHV
QR
7'
\HV
$WWHQXDWLRQWRRJRRG"
QR
%\LQFUHDVLQJWKH7'LV
QR
WKHUHDQRWLFHDEOH
LPSURYHPHQWLQWKH
DWWHQXWDWLRQ"
\HV
5HYHUVHWKH*$,1DQG7'XQWLOWKH
WUDQVLWLRQIXQFWLRQKDVDRYHUVKRRW
7, 7'
2YHUVKRRW!"
\HV
QR
\HV 7DUJHW
2YHUVKRRWป" UHDFKHG
QR
Figure 2-12 Setting the controller by means of targeted experimentation

2.8 Establishing parameters by experiment
2SWLPXPFRQWUROOHUVHWWLQJ
0' 7 'RSW

0' 7 'RSW
7, 7, RSW

7, 7, RSW
7*$,1 *$,1 RSW 7*$,1 *$,1 RSW
Figure 2-13 Effects on the optimum controller setting when changing the controller parameters

How Does the FM 355 Control? 3
3.1 3.1 Basic Structure of the FM 355
Introduction
This section uses block diagrams to explain the basic structure and the interconnection
possibilities of the FM 355.
Basic Structure of the FM 355

FM 355 C and FM 355 S have a similar basic structure. It consists of the following function
blocks:
• Inputs of the FM 355
– 4 analog inputs with analog value conditioning
– 1 reference junction input for compensating thermocouples
– 8 digital inputs
• Controller
– 4 controller channels independent of each other, each subdivided into the units
Negative deviation calculation, Control algorithm and Controller output
• Outputs of the FM 355
– 4 analog outputs (only FM 355 C)
– 8 digital outputs (only FM 355 S)

How Does the FM 355 Control?
3.1 Basic Structure of the FM 355
Block Diagram of the FM 355 C

The following figure shows the block diagram of the FM 355 C (continuous-action controller)
and the interconnection possibilities under the individual function blocks.
)0&LQSXWV &RQWUROOHU )0&RXWSXWV
$QDORJLQSXW $QDORJYDOXH
SUHSDUDWLRQ
$QDORJRXWSXW

&RQWUROOHU
FKDQQHOV

SUHSDUDWLRQ
5HIHUHQFH
MXQFWLRQIRUDQDORJ
LQSXWVWR
$QDORJRXWSXW
&RQWUROOHU
FKDQQHOV

'LJLWDOLQSXW

'LJLWDOLQSXW 7KHLQSXWVDQGRXWSXWVFDQ
EHDVVLJQHGIUHHO\WRWKH
FRQWUROOHUFKDQQHOV
Figure 3-1 Block diagram of the FM 355 C (continuous-action controller)
Interconnection Possibilities of the FM 355 C

The function blocks of the FM 355 C do not have a fixed assignment to each other, so that
they can be interconnected by configuring parameters.
Each analog input has its own analog value conditioning (filtering, linearization, scaling).
Up to 4 analog inputs and up to 3 digital inputs can be assigned to each controller channel.
Each controller channel can be interconnected with the conditioned analog values, the digital
inputs or also the output of another controller channel.
Each analog output can be interconnected with a controller output or with an analog value
conditioning. The interconnection possibility with an analog value conditioning can, for
example, be used to convert a non-linear temperature value into a linear output signal.

3.1 Basic Structure of the FM 355
Block Diagram of the FM 355 S

The following figure shows the block diagram of the FM 355 S (step controller) and the
interconnection possibilities under the individual function blocks.
)06LQSXWV &RQWUROOHU )0bb6RXWSXWV
SUHSDUDWLRQ
GLJLWDORXWSXW
&RQWUROOHU
FKDQQHOV
GLJLWDORXWSXW

SUHSDUDWLRQ &RQWUROOHU GLJLWDORXWSXW
FKDQQHOV
GLJLWDORXWSXW

5HIHUHQFH GLJLWDORXWSXW
MXQFWLRQIRU &RQWUROOHU

DQDORJLQSXWV FKDQQHOV
GLJLWDORXWSXW
WR

&RQWUROOHU GLJLWDORXWSXW

'LJLWDOLQSXW FKDQQHOV
GLJLWDORXWSXW

'LJLWDOLQSXW
7KHLQSXWVDQGRXWSXWVFDQ
EHDVVLJQHGIUHHO\WRWKH
FRQWUROOHUFKDQQHOV
Figure 3-2 Block diagram of the FM 355 S (step controller)
Interconnection Possibilities of the FM 355 S

The function blocks of the FM 355 S do not have a fixed assignment to each other, so that
they can be interconnected by configuring parameters.
Each analog input has its own analog value conditioning (filtering, linearization, scaling).
Up to 4 analog inputs and up to 5 digital inputs can be assigned to each controller channel
Each controller channel can be interconnected with the conditioned analog values, the digital
inputs or also the output of another controller channel.
Two digital outputs each have a fixed assignment to the 4 controller channels.

3.2 Basic Parameters
3.2 3.2 Basic Parameters
Introduction
The FM 355 has basic parameters that influence the interrupts and the reaction on CPU-
STOP.
Basic Parameters
The basic parameters can be set under HW Config in the "Basic parameters" mask. The
following settings are possible:
• Interrupt generation
– Yes
– No
• Interrupt selection
– None
– Diagnostics interrupt
• Reaction to CPU Stop
– Continue
3.3 3.3 FM 355 inputs
Controller module inputs

Different types of sensor can be connected to the analog inputs. The input signals of the
sensors are then conditioned in accordance with the requirements.
With the aid of the digital inputs, the module can be interconnected to different operating
modes.
C controllers and S controllers have the same structure in the case of analog and digital
inputs.

3.3 FM 355 inputs
3.3.1 Analog inputs
Function blocks of an analog input

6HQVRUW\SH
$
'
3UHSURFHVVHG
)LOWHU 6TXDUHURRW 3RO\OLQH 6WDQGDUGL]H DQDORJYDOXH
5HIHUHQFH
LQSXW
FRQILJXUHG
Figure 3-3 Analog value conditioning
Adapting to sensors
The analog inputs can be configured for adaptation to different sensors. The following
settings are possible:
• Analog input is not being processed (e.g. unused input)
• Power sensors 0 mA to 20 mA
• Power sensors 4 mA to 20 mA
• Voltage sensors 0 V to 10 V
• Pt 100, –200 ... 850 °C
• Pt 100, –200 ... 556 °C (double resolution)
• Pt 100, –200 ... 130 °C (quadruple resolution)
• Thermocouple elements type B, J, K, R and S (analog input set to ±80 mV)
• Free thermocouple element (analog input set to ±80 mV)
You configure the analog inputs in the "analog input" screen.
Adapting to line frequency

To suppress interference when measuring analog signals, the input signal processing is
adapted to the line frequency. The following settings are possible:
• 50 Hz operation
• 60 Hz operation
This configuration is carried out in the parameterization interface (button: Module
parameters).

3.3 FM 355 inputs
Toggling between Celsius / Fahrenheit

Temperatures can be measured in either °C or °F.
parameters).
Reference junction
If you have set a thermocouple element as a sensor on an analog input, you can connect a
Pt 100 at the reference junction input of the module in order to compensate for the reference
junction temperature with thermocouple elements. Alternatively, a fixed reference junction
temperature can be configured.
parameters).
When using the reference junction input, the scanning time of each controller extends by the
conversion time for the reference junction input.
Analog value conditioning

The analog value conditioning offers various configurable possibilities of preparing the input
signals. The following table gives an overview of these parameters and the values that can
be set.
Parameters Values that can be set Note

Resolution • 12 bits Conversion time 20 ms (50 Hz)
• 14 bits Conversion time 162/3 ms (60 Hz)
Conversion time 100 ms
Filters • ON / OFF Filter - 1st arrangement the time
• Time constant in s response of which is established by the
time constant
Square root • ON / OFF To linearize encoder signals where the
actual value is given as a physical
variable that is in quadratic connection
with the measured process variable.
Standardization • bottom To convert the input signal into a
• top different physical unit by means of linear
interpolation between the start value
(bottom) and the end value (top)
Polyline • ON / OFF To linearize encoder characteristic
• 13 support points can be chosen in curves
– mA with current input
– mV with voltage input
Note
Standardization/polyline: The conversion of the unit mA or mV into a physical unit takes
place either via the polyline or - if this is not switched on - via standardization. The polyline is
used to linearize a free thermocouple element or for any other linearization.

3.3 FM 355 inputs
3.3.2 Digital Inputs
Operating Modes
The digital inputs are used to switch between operating modes of the individual controller
channels.
The direction of control action of the digital inputs can be configured. The following settings
are possible for each of the eight digital inputs:
• High active
• Low active or open
This configuration is carried out in the parameter configuration interface (Module parameters
button).
You can select the following operating modes:
• Switchover to specification of the manipulated value PID_FM FB
• Switchover to follow-up control mode (specification of the manipulated value via an
analog input)
• Switchover to safety manipulated value
In the case of a step controller you can furthermore specify the following signals via digital
inputs:
• Checkback: Actuating device at upper limit stop
• Checkback: Actuating device at lower limit stop

3.4 Controller
3.4 3.4 Controller
Controller structure
The controller of any channel of the module consists of the following blocks:
• Negative deviation generation
– Condition of setpoint value and actual value
– Signal selection for setpoint value, actual value, D-action input and disturbance
variable
• Control algorithm
– Temperature controller
– PID-action controller with dead band
• Controller output
– Manipulated value switchover
– Manipulated value conditioning
The parameter configuration is carried out in the masks "Negative deviation calculation",
"Control algorithm" and "Controller output".
The figure below provides an overview of the controller structure.
&RQWUROOHUV
(UURUVLJQDO &RQWUROOHUDOJRULWKP &RQWUROOHURXWSXW
Figure 3-4 Controller structure
Controller Type
You can set different controller types for each controller channel of a C or S controller
module
• Fixed setpoint or cascade controller
• Three-component controllers
• Ratio/blending controllers
The following operating modes can furthermore be selected at the step (S) controller:
• Pulse controller
• Step controller with position feedback
• Step controller without position feedback

3.4 Controller
Negative deviation generation

In the case of all controller types realized in the FM 355 C and FM 355 S, the negative
deviation generation is based on the same basic structure.
An effective setpoint value and an effective actual value is formed from the setpoint value
and actual value by corresponding conditioning. The negative deviation that is fed to the
controller is formed by subtracting the effective setpoint value and effective actual value.
A signal selection can be carried out for the setpoint and actual values. This results in
universal application possibilities for the controller module.
The structures of negative deviation generation differ depending on the selected controller
type. The differences are shown in the following figures.
3UHSDULQJWKHVHWSRLQW
6HWSRLQW (IIHFWLYHVHW
SRLQW
6ZLWFKLQJ 5DPS /LPLWLQJ
VDIHW\VHW
SRLQW (UURU
VLJQDO
,QWHUUXSW$ODUP
3URFHVVYDOXH$ (IIHFWLYH
SURFHVV
YDOXH
'LQSXW
'LVWXUEDQFH
YDULDEOH
Figure 3-5 Negative Deviation Generation at Fixed Setpoint or Cascade Controller
The manipulated value of a master controller is selected at the setpoint value at the cascade
controller. In the example from the figure below the manipulated value of Controller 1 is
selected as the setpoint value at Controller 2.
If a secondary controller that is configured as a fixed setpoint controller is switched to
manual operation (not closed-loop control operation), the master controller is also switched
automatically to manual operation by the module and is held to the last manipulated value.
As soon as the secondary controller returns to closed-loop control operation, the master
controller also switches over to closed-loop control operation.
If the manipulated variable of a secondary controller enters the limiting function or if the
setpoint value increase of a secondary controller is limited by the ramp function in the
setpoint value branch, the I-action component of the master controller is blocked direction-
specifically until the cause for the limitation has been eliminated in the secondary controller.

3.4 Controller
&3 /01 4/0183

6HFWLRQದ 6HFWLRQದ
&RQWUROOHU &RQWUROOHU 4/01'1 SDUW SDUW
39 39
Figure 3-6 Two-loop cascade control
5DPS /LPLWLQJ SRLQW
6ZLWFKLQJ
VDIHW\VHW
SRLQW (UURUVLJQDO
7RWDOL]LQJ
)DFWRUIRUSURFHVVYDOXH%
)DFWRUIRUSURFHVVYDOXH&
2IIVHW ,QWHUUXSW
3URFHVVYDOXH
(IIHFWLYH
$
SURFHVVYDOXH
3URFHVVYDOXH
%
'LQSXW
3URFHVVYDOXH&
'LVWXUEDQFHYDULDEOH
Figure 3-7 Negative deviation generation for three-component controllers

3.4 Controller
3UHSDULQJWKHVHWSRLQW 0XOWLSO\LQJ
5DPS /LPLWVWDQGDUG SRLQW
6ZLWFKLQJ
VDIHW\VHW L]H
SRLQW (UURU
VLJQDO
$FWXDOYDOXH'
,QWHUUXSW$ODUP
SURFHVVYDOXH
'LQSXW
'LVWXUEDQFH
YDULDEOH
Figure 3-8 Negative deviation generation for ratio or composition controllers
The following figure shows a blending control for three components.

The total quantity controller is implemented as a three-component controller/pulse controller.
The total quantity PV is calculated via its inputs "Actual value A", "Actual value B" and
"Actual value C".
The secondary controllers are configured as ratio/blending controllers. The manipulated
variable of the master controller is connected via the "Actual value D" input. The factor FAC1
to FAC3 is specified via the setpoint value input of the controller.
The manipulated variable LMN of the total quantity controller is specified in the range of
values 0% to 100%. The secondary controller converts this variable at the Actual value input
D into the value range of the Actual value A (the value range of the Actual value A consists
of the "Upper" and "Lower" normalization values of the selected analog input).

3.4 Controller
7RWDOTXDQWLW\ 0DLQFRPSRQHQWV
63RU
63 /01 KLJKHU 4/0183
ದ &RQWUROOHUV ; ದ &RQWUROOHU 4/01'1 3URFHVV
39
)$& 39
63 4/0183
; ದ &RQWUROOHU 4/01'1 3URFHVV
)$&
39
63 4/0183
; ದ &RQWUROOHU 4/01'1 3URFHVV
)$&
39
Figure 3-9 Mixed controllers for three components
The following figure shows a ratio control with two control loops.
Controller 1 is configured as a fixed setpoint or cascade controller.
Controller 2 is configured as a ratio/blending controller. The actual value of Controller 1 is
selected as the Actual value D of Controller 2. The ratio factor FAC is specified via the
setpoint value input of Controller 2. If a controller output is called as ratio factor FAC, then
the setpoint will be converted (standardized) with the help of an upper and lower barrier from
"0 .. 100%" to the value range "bottom barrier... top barrier" (standardized).
63b
&RQWUROOHU /01 3URFHVV
39
;
63b
/01
&RQWUROOHU 3URFHVV
39
Figure 3-10 Ratio control with two control loops

3.4 Controller
Signal Selection for Setpoint Value, D-Action Input and Disturbance Variable
You can carry out a selection amongst various signal sources for the setpoint value, the
actual values, the value of the D-action input (differential input) and the disturbance variable
of each controller channel. The following table provides an overview of the signal selection
possibilities.
Table 3-1 Signal selection for setpoint value, D-action input and disturbance variable
Affected values Selectable signal source

Setpoint • A value specified by the user program through the function block
• The conditioned analog value of an analog input
• The manipulated value of another controller channel (when controllers
are cascaded)
Actual values A, B and • The conditioned analog value of an analog input
C
(Actual values B and C can also be deactivated)
Actual value D • Zero
(Actual value D can also be deactivated)
Value for D-action input • The negative deviation after the dead band of the own controller
(only relevant for PD- or channel
PID-action controllers) • The conditioned analog value of an analog input
• The negated effective actual value of the own controller channel
Interference • The conditioned analog value of an analog input
(the value zero can also be specified for the disturbance variable)
Setpoint Value Conditioning

Conditioning of the setpoint value to an effective setpoint value can be influenced by the
following parameter configuration possibilities:
• Switching the safety setpoint value
The following can be set here:
– A safety setpoint value
– The reaction of the controller module at a CPU failure
– The reaction of the controller module at a startup
The alternatives for the reaction of the controller module are:
Setpoint value = Last setpoint value
Setpoint value = Safety setpoint value
• Ramp
You can limit the speed of change of the setpoint value by selecting a ramp-up time from
the engineering starting value to end value.
• Limiting/Normalizing
The setpoint value is limited to a specifiable lower and upper limit when the setpoint value
is specified by the function block or when the setpoint value is a conditioned analog value
of an analog input.

3.4 Controller
If, in the case of ratio controllers, a controller output is chosen as the set value, then this
value acts as a factor for the multiplication of the actual value D. The set value that is
given at the input in %, is in this case converted (standardized) with the aid of the bottom
and top barriers.
If the manipulated value of another controller is used as the setpoint value at a fixed
setpoint or cascade controller (for example at the cascade control function, this is
normalized to an engineering value by means of the normalizing constant of the selected
actual value channel.
• Multiplication
At the "ratio controller" controller type, Actual value A is used as the controlled variable,
Actual value D as the ratio variable. The setpoint value input serves as the ratio factor. It
is conditioned as the effective setpoint value by multiplication with Actual value D and
addition of an offset that can be set. If Actual value D is deactivated, only the offset is
added to the setpoint value.
Actual Value Conditioning

In the case of the "fixed-setpoint or cascade controllers" and "ratio controllers" control
structures the effective actual value is identical with Actual value A.
In the case of the "Three-component controllers" control structure the effective actual value
is formed by totaling the three actual values A, B and C and by adding an offset that can be
set. Actual values B and C can be evaluated additionally through factors.
Interrupt
A limit monitoring function is implemented in the controller module. This allows
• either the negative deviation or
• the effective actual value
to be monitored to an upper and lower warning limit and an upper and lower interrupt limit. In
addition you can set a hysteresis for these limits (refer to the following figure).
/RZHUZDUQLQJDQG 8SSHUZDUQLQJDQG
LQWHUUXSWOLPLWV LQWHUUXSWOLPLWV
,QFRPLQJLQWHUUXSW
RXWJRLQJLQWHUUXSW
K\VWHUHVLV
Figure 3-11 Hysteresis for warning and interrupt limits

3.4 Controller
Control Algorithm
At the control algorithm you can select between the following operating modes:
• Temperature controller (self-tuning fuzzy controller)
• PID-action controller
Continuous-action controllers and step controllers have the same control algorithm structure
(refer to the following figure).
HIIHFWLYHVHWSRLQW
HIIHFWLYHSURFHVVYDOXH 7HPSHUDWXUH
FRQWUROOHU HIIHFWLYH
PDQLSXODWHG
3,' YDULDEOH
(UURUVLJQDO
'HDG]RQH
'LQSXW
0DQLSXODWHGYDULDEOHIROORZXS
'LVWXUEDQFHYDULDEOH
Figure 3-12 Block diagram of the control algorithm
Temperature Controller
The temperature controller is a self-tuning fuzzy controller that operates with self-determined
control parameters after an identification of the controlled system.
The following settings are possible at the temperature controller:
• Cooling controller
• Heating controller
• Aggressivity
You can influence the speed of the transient behavior by using the Aggressivity
parameter.
Possible values for the aggressivity

–1 ≤ Aggressivity < 0 Slower transient response than determined via identification
Aggressivity = 0 Transient response as determined via identification
0 < Aggressivity ≤ 1 Faster transient response than determined via identification
You will find a detailed description of the temperature controller in the Temperature regulator
FM 355 manual.

3.4 Controller
Control Algorithm and Controller Structure

Within the cycle of the configured sampling time the manipulated variable of the continuous
controller is calculated from the negative deviation in the PID position algorithm. The
controller is designed as a purely parallel structure (refer to figure below). The proportional,
integral or derivative actions can each be deactivated individually. At the integral- and
differential-action components this is done by setting the respective parameter TI or TD to
zero.
',69B6(/
',69
3B6(/
3
*$,1
(5 ; , /01
/LQHDUFRPELQDWLRQ
'
Figure 3-13 Control algorithm of the FM 355 (parallel structure)
Disturbance variable compensation

A disturbance variable DISV can additionally be fed forward to the output signal of the
controller. Activation and deactivation is carried out in the "Negative deviation" window of the
configuration tool via the "Signal selection disturbance variable controller" switch.
P / D part in the feedback
In a parallel structure the negative deviation is used as the input signal at every action
component of the control algorithm. In this structure setpoint steps act directly on the
controller. The manipulated variable is influenced directly via the P- and D-action
components through setpoint steps.
However, a different structure of the controller, in which the formation of the P-action and D-
action components is moved to the feedback, guarantees a smooth course of the
manipulated variable at step changes in the reference variable (see following figure).
In this structure the I-action component processes the negative deviation as the input signal.
Only the negative controlled variable (factor = - 1) is fed forward to the P-action and D-action
components. In the D-action component the changeover to the feedback is carried out in the
"Negative deviation" window via the "D-action input controller" switch by selecting the
negated effective actual value as the input signal. The input variable of the D-action
component can also be selected via the D_EL_SEL parameter of the PID_FM function block.
*$,1
(5 ; ,
ದ 3 /01
39 ; ;
'
Figure 3-14 Control algorithm with P- and D-action component in the feedback path

3.4 Controller
Reversing of the Controller Action

Reversal means, changing the controller from the assignment
• Rising controlled variable = Rising manipulated variable to
• Rising controlled variable = Falling manipulated variable
is achieved by setting a negative proportional-action gain at the GAIN parameter. The sign of
this parameter value is defined by the direction of control action of the controller.
P-Action Control
The I-action and the D-action components are deactivated at the P-action controller. This
means that the manipulated value also equals 0 when the Negative deviation ER = 0. If an
operating point is to be ≠ 0, i.e. if a numerical value is to be set for the manipulated variable
at negative deviation zero, this can be done via the operating point:
• Operating point automatic: The operating point is set to the current (manual) manipulated
variable at the manual-automatic changeover of the controller.
• Operating point not automatic: You can configure the operating point parameter.
Example: Operating point OP = 5% results in a manipulated variable of 5% at Negative
deviation ER = 0.
3B6(/
3
*$,1
(5 , $XWRPDWLF
;
/01
QRWDXWRPDWLF
2SHUDWLQJSRLQW
Figure 3-15 P-action controller with operating point setting via I-action element
(5 0DQLSXODWHGYDULDEOH
W
0DQLSXODWHG
YDULDEOH
(5W
Figure 3-16 Step response of the P-action controller

3.4 Controller
PI Control
The D-action component is deactivated at the PI-action controller. A PI -action controller
adjusts the output variable via the I-action component until the Negative deviation ER = 0.
However, this only applies if the output variable does not exceed the limits of the operating
range. If the manipulated variable limits are exceeded, the I-action component retains the
value reached at the limit (anti reset wind-up).
(5
0DQLSXODWHG 0DQLSXODWHGYDULDEOH
W
YDULDEOH
*$,1 (5
*$,1 (5W
*$,1 (5 (5W
W
7,
Figure 3-17 Step response of the PI-action controller
Smooth Changeover between Manual and Automatic Mode

In order to change over smoothly from manual mode to automatic mode of the PI-/PID-action
controller, the integrator is corrected in manual mode so that the manipulated variable does
not carry out step changes through the P- and D-action components during a changeover
from manual to automatic mode. An existing negative deviation is only corrected slowly via
the I-action component. If no smooth changeover from manual to automatic mode is
selected, the manipulated variable makes a step change, that corresponds to the current
negative deviation, starting from the current manual value during a changeover from manual
to automatic mode. An existing negative deviation is thus corrected rapidly.
I Control
You can deactivate the P-action component in order to implement a pure I control. This is
also possible by using the P_SEL parameter of the PID_FM function block.
PD Control
The I-action component is deactivated at the PD-action controller. This means that the
output signal also equals 0 when the Negative deviation ER = 0. If an operating point is to be
≠ 0, i.e. if a numerical value is to be set for the manipulated variable at negative deviation
zero, this can be done via the operating point:
• Operating point automatic: The operating point is set to the current (manual) manipulated
variable at the manual-automatic changeover of the controller.
• Operating point not automatic: You can configure the operating point parameter.
The PD-action controller maps the input variable ER(t) proportionally to the output signal and
adds the D-action component formed through differentiation of ER(t) that is calculated with
double precision in accordance with the trapezoid rule (Padé approximant). The time
response is determined by the differentiation time constant (differential-action time) TD.

3.4 Controller
For smoothing and suppressing disturbance signals, a delay of the 1st arrangement (time
constant that can be set: TM_LAG) is integrated in the algorithm to form the D part. Usually a
small value for TM_LAG is sufficient in order to achieve the desired success.
(5
0DQLSXODWHG
YDULDEOH
*$,1 7' (5 0DQLSXODWHGYDULDEOH W

70B/$*
(5W
*$,1 (5
W
70B/$*
Figure 3-18 Step response of the PD-action controller
PID-action Control
The P-action, I-action and D-action components are activated at the PID-action controller. A
PID-action controller adjusts the output variable via the I-action component until the Negative
deviation ER = 0. However, this only applies if the output variable does not exceed the limits
of the operating range. If the manipulated variable limits are exceeded, the I-action
component retains the value reached at the limit (anti reset wind-up).
The PID-action controller maps the input variable ER(t) proportionally to the output signal
and adds the components formed through differentiation and integration of ER(t) that are
calculated with double precision in accordance with the trapezoid rule (Padé approximant).
The time response is determined by the differentiation time constant (differential-action time)
TD and the integration time constant (reset time) TI.
For smoothing and suppressing disturbance signals, a delay of the 1st arrangement (time
constant that can be set: TM_LAG) is integrated in the algorithm to form the D part. Usually a
small value for TM_LAG is sufficient in order to achieve the desired success
(5
0DQLSXODWHG
YDULDEOH
*$,1 7' (5
70B/$* 0DQLSXODWHGYDULDEOH W
*$,1 (5
(5W
*$,1 (5
W
70B/$*
7,
Figure 3-19 Step response of the PID-action controller

3.4 Controller
Use and Configuration of the PID Controller

A major practical problem is the configuration of the PI-/PID-action controller parameters, i.e.
finding the "correct" setting values for the controller parameters. The quality of this
configuration is of decisive importance to ensure that the PID control functions in accordance
with the required task and requires either a high degree of practical experience, special
knowledge or a large amount of time.
The Optimize PID-action controller function contained in the Configuration tool is used for
initial setting of the controller parameters through adaptive commissioning. This means that
the process model is determined after a system identification and then the most favorable
(optimal) setting values calculated for the controller parameters. This procedure, which is
automatic to a great extent, means that the user does not have to tediously "trim" the
installed PID-action controller online manually.
Dead Band
A dead band is positioned upstream of the PID-action controller. In a steady controller state
the dead band suppresses the noise in the negative deviation signal, which can arise
through superimposition of a higher-frequency interference signal over the controlled or
reference variable, thus preventing undesired oscillation of the controller output.
The dead band width can be adjusted. If the negative deviation lies within the set dead band
width, the value 0 (Negative deviation = 0) is output at the dead band output. Only when the
input variable leaves the sensitivity range, does the output change by the same values at the
input variable (see the figure below).
This results in a transferred signal being corrupted, also outside the dead band. However,
this is accepted in order to avoid step changes at the limits of the dead band. The corruption
corresponds to the value of the dead band width and can therefore be controlled easily.
(UURUVLJQDORQ
GHDGEDQGRXWSXW
(UURUVLJQDORQWKH
GHDGEDQGLQSXW
'HDGEDQGZLGWK
Figure 3-20 Dead band

3.4 Controller
Controller Output
The controller output block of the control unit has a different structure at the continuous-
action controller and at the three operating modes of the step controller.
Various interconnection possibilities are implemented at the controller output for the
manipulated value, the tracking input and the safety manipulated value (manipulated value
switchover).
To avoid the manipulated value adopting illegal values for the process, a limit is specified.
The split range function generates from the manipulated value as an input signal two
differently standardized output signals - manipulated value A and manipulated value B. This
way, for example, two values can be controlled with one manipulated value.
The manipulated value correction prevents a step change at the manipulated value during
the changeover from manual to automatic mode.
The manipulated value remains unchanged during the changeover from manual to automatic
mode. Manipulated value correction is not active when a pure P-action controller with fixed
operating point is implemented ("automatic" is not activated in the PID-action controller
mask).
Controller Output of the Continuous-Action Controller
H[WHUQDO
PDQLSXODWHG
YDULDEOH
(IIHFWLYH 6ZLWFK
PDQLSXODWHG H[WHUQDO
YDULDEOH PDQLSXODWHG 0DQLSXODWHG
YDOXH YDULDEOH
0DQLSXODWHG
6ZLWFK 6ZLWFKLQJ /LPLWLQJ 6SOLWUDQJH YDULDEOH$
FRUUHFWLRQ VDIHW\
PDQLSXODWHG
YDULDEOH
&RUUHFWLRQLQSXW 0DQLSXODWHG
YDULDEOH%
0DQLSXODWHGYDULDEOH
IROORZXS
Figure 3-21 Controller output of the continuous-action controller

3.4 Controller
Split-Range Function
The split-range function is used to control two control valves with one manipulated variable.
The split-range function generates the two output signals, Manipulated value A and
Manipulated value B, from the manipulated value LMN as the input signal.
The following figure shows the effect of the parameters for the output manipulated value A.
0DQLSXODWHG
YDULDEOH$RXWSXW
VLJQDO
6WDUWRIRXWSXW
VLJQDOUDQJH
(QGRIRXWSXWVLJQDO
UDQJH
0DQLSXODWHG
YDULDEOH/01LQSXW
VLJQDO
6WDUWRILQSXWVLJQDO (QGRILQSXW
UDQJH VLJQDOUDQJH
Figure 3-22 Split-range function manipulated value A
The following figure shows the effect of the parameters for the output manipulated value B.
0DQLSXODWHG
YDULDEOH%RXWSXW
VLJQDO
6WDUWRIRXWSXW
VLJQDOUDQJH
(QGRIRXWSXWVLJQDO
UDQJH
0DQLSXODWHG
YDULDEOH/01LQSXW
VLJQDO
6WDUWRILQSXWVLJQDO (QGRILQSXW
UDQJH VLJQDOUDQJH
Figure 3-23 Split-range function manipulated value B
The start of range of the input signal must be smaller than the end of range of the input
signal.

3.4 Controller
Analog Output
And the analog output you can select the signal that is to be output for each channel. This is
usually the Manipulated value A of a controller. However, you can also select the
Manipulated value B of a controller or also an analog input value. The latter can be used for
the linearization of an analog value. This allows, for example, the signal supplied by a
thermocouple to be linearized and converted to 0 V to 10 V.
Controller Output of the Pulse Controller

H[WHUQDO
PDQLSX
ODWHG
YDULDEOH
HIIHFWLYH 6ZLWFK
PDQLSX H[WHUQDO
ODWHG PDQLSX 0DQLSXODWHG
YDULDEOH ODWHGYDOXH YDULDEOH
6ZLWFK 6ZLWFKLQJ /LPLWLQJ 6SOLWUDQJH

FRUUHFWLRQ VDIHW\ SXOVHVKDSHU
PDQLSXODWHG
YDULDEOH
&RUUHFWLRQLQSXW
Figure 3-24 Controller output of the step controller (pulse controller operating mode)
Split-Range Function/Pulse Generator

The split-range function is the preparation of the analog signal for conversion to a binary
signal.
In the case of a two-step controller (for example, a heating controller) only manipulated
variable A is relevant. The conversion of the manipulated value to the manipulated value A is
shown in the figure below "Split-range function two-step controller". The conversion to a
binary output signal is carried out so that the ratio of pulse length to period duration
corresponds to the manipulated value A at the assigned digital output.
For example, a manipulated value A of 40% at a period duration of 60 seconds results in a
pulse length of 24 seconds and a pause duration of 36 seconds.

3.4 Controller
The classification of the digital outputs to the controller channels can be found in the table in
the section "FM 355 outputs".
0DQLSXODWHG
YDULDEOH$RXWSXW
VLJQDO
6WDUWRIRXWSXW
VLJQDOUDQJH
0DQLSXODWHG
YDULDEOH/01LQSXW
(QGRIRXWSXWVLJQDO 6WDUWRILQSXWVLJQDO (QGRILQSXWVLJQDO VLJQDO
UDQJH UDQJH UDQJH
Figure 3-25 Split-range function two-step controllers
In the case of a three-point controller (for example, as a heating and cooling controller) the
statements above apply for the manipulated value A. The second signal for controlling the
cooling is formed via the manipulated value B. The conversion of the manipulated value to
the manipulated values A and B is shown in the figure below. The conversion to a binary
output signal is carried out so that the ratio of pulse length to period duration corresponds to
the manipulated values A and B at the assigned digital outputs.
The classification of the digital outputs to the controller channels can be found in the table
"Functions of the controller output and setting possibilities".
0DQLSXODWHG
YDULDEOHV$DQG% 0DQLSXODWHGYDULDEOH$
RXWSXWVLJQDOV
0DQLSXODWHG 0DQLSXODWHGYDULDEOH%
YDULDEOH%VWDUWRI
RXWSXWVLJQDOUDQJH
0DQLSXODWHG
YDULDEOH/01LQSXW
0DQLSXODWHG 0DQLSXODWHG 0DQLSXODWHG VLJQDO
YDULDEOH%VWDUWRI YDULDEOH%HQGRI YDULDEOH%HQGRI
LQSXWVLJQDOUDQJH LQSXWVLJQDOUDQJH RXWSXWVLJQDOUDQJH
Figure 3-26 Split-range function three-step controller

3.4 Controller
Controller Output of the Step Controller

H[WHUQDO
PDQLSXODWHG
YDULDEOH
HIIHFWLYH 6ZLWFK
PDQLSX H[WHUQDO
6ZLWFK 6ZLWFKLQJ /LPLWLQJ

IROORZXS VDIHW\ 3XOVH
PDQLSXODWHG VKDSHU
YDULDEOH
)ROORZXSLQSXW
3RVLWLRQIHHGEDFNLQSXW
Figure 3-27 Controller output of the step controller (step controller operating mode with position
feedback)
H[WHUQDOPDQLSXODWHG
YDULDEOH
HIIHFWLYH 6ZLWFK 6ZLWFKLQJ 3XOVH

PDQLSXODWHG H[WHUQDO VDIHW\ VKDSHU
YDULDEOH PDQLSXODWHG PDQLSXODWHG
YDOXH YDULDEOH
Figure 3-28 Controller output of the step controller (step controller operating mode without position
feedback)
At a step controller without analog position feedback the external manipulated value and the
safety manipulated value act as follows:
If a value between 40.0% and 60.0% is specified, no binary output is set and the actuating
device remains unchanged.
If a value > 60.0% is specified, "Actuating signal high" is output until the checkback
"Actuating device at upper limit" is triggered.
If a value < 40.0% is specified, "Actuating signal low" is output until the checkback "Actuating
device at lower limit" is triggered.

3.4 Controller
Functions and parameters of the controller output

The following table lists the functions of the controller output and the setting possibilities.
Table 3-2 Functions of the controller output and setting possibilities
Functions of the controller output Adjustable parameters

Switching of external manipulated value The changeover between an external manipulated value and the effective
manipulated value is carried out alternatively by
• a binary value from the function block
• a signal that results from the ORing of a binary value from the function block
and a digital input
Tracking input The following alternative settings are available:
• The tracking input has the value zero
• The tracking input is the conditioned analog value of an analog input
Position feedback input (only step The following alternative settings are available:
controller) • The position feedback input has the value zero
• The position feedback input is the conditioned analog value of an analog
input
Switching to tracking The changeover between the manipulated value and the tracking input is carried
out alternatively
• A binary value from the function block
• A signal that results from the ORing of a binary value from the function block
and a digital input
Switching to safety manipulated value • Determination of the safety manipulated value
• Alternative reaction of the FM 355 during start up:
– The FM 355 goes into closed-loop control operation
– The safety manipulated value is output as the manipulated value
• The changeover to the safety manipulated value is carried alternatively by
– A binary value from the function block
– A signal that results from the ORing of a binary value from the function
block and a digital input
• Reaction at a measuring transducer fault of Actual value A:
– The operating mode of the controller remains unchanged at the setting
"Closed-loop control operation"
– If the setting is "Manipulated value = Safety manipulated value", the
system changes over to the safety manipulated value
• Reaction at a measuring transducer fault of an analog input:
– The operating mode of the controller remains unchanged at the setting
"Closed-loop control operation"
– If the setting is "Manipulated value = Safety manipulated value", the
system changes over to the safety manipulated value
Manipulated value limit Upper and lower limit (cannot be deactivated)
Generation of the split-range • On/off (only continuous-action controllers)
manipulated values • Starting and end value of input signal
• Starting and end value of output signal
Pulse generator (only step controller) • Motor actuating time
• Minimum pulse time
• Minimum break time

3.4 Controller
See also
Parameter optimization with temperature controllers (Page 3-41)
Introduction (Page 7-2)

3.5 Outputs of the FM 355
3.5 3.5 Outputs of the FM 355
Analog Outputs of the FM 355 C

You can carry out the following specifications through parameter configuration for each
analog output of the FM 355 C:
• Signal selection
• Signal type
The output parameters are configured in the "Signal selection analog output" and "Signal
type analog output" masks.
Signal Selection at the Analog Outputs

With the signal selection you can specify which signal value is to be output at the respective
analog output.
The following signal values can be assigned:
• The value zero
• The conditioned analog value of the four analog inputs
• Manipulated value A of one of the four controller channels
• Manipulated value B of one of the four controller channels
Signal Type at the Analog Outputs

You can determine the signal type for each analog output.
The following signal types can be assigned:
• Current output 0 mA to 20 mA
• Current output 4 mA to 20 mA
• Voltage output 0 V to 10 V
• Voltage output -10 V to 10 V

3.5 Outputs of the FM 355
Digital Outputs of the FM 355 S

The digital outputs of the FM 355 S are used to control integrating or non-integrating
actuators.
The assignment of the digital outputs to the controller channels and their meaning are shown
in the following table:
Table 3-3 Assignment and meaning of the digital outputs
Controller Digital outputs assigned to Meaning of the digital Assignment of the digital
channel the controller channel outputs at the step outputs at the pulse
controller controller
1 1 Open Manipulated value A
2 Close Manipulated value B
Open: Opening the actuating device
Close: Closing the actuating device

3.6 Functional mechanisms and data storage in the FM 355
3.6 3.6 Functional mechanisms and data storage in the FM 355
Overview
This chapter covers important functional mechanisms and the principle of data storage in the
controller module.
The parameter configuration interface of the programming device/PC can be used to carry
out the following actions on the controller module
• parameter configuration,
• optimizing,
• operator control and monitoring.
The PID_FM function block (FB) that belongs to the scope of delivery can be used to
connect the module with a user program.
Parameter settings
The FM 355 is configured by means of a parameter configuration interface on the
programming device (refer to the chapter "Wiring the FM 355"). All the parameter
configuration data are stored in a SDB on the programming device.
Note
Only in the STOP state of the CPU can you download the SDB configuration data into the
CPU and into the FM 355 via an online connection between the programming device and the
CPU. This is only possible via the HW Config. In doing so, the parameter configuration
interface must be closed.
The FM 355 is supplied again with the parameters from the SDB in the CPU during every
start-up and during the transition of the CPU from STOP to RUN.
Downloading the Parameters Directly into the FM 355

It is also possible to download the parameters directly into the FM 355 via the parameter
configuration interface so that you do not have to close the parameter configuration interface
and set the CPU to the STOP state several times consecutively while the parameter
configuration is being tested during commissioning.
Please note that the parameters loaded by this method are overwritten by the parameters
from the SDB of the CPU when the CPU is started up and at a STOP-RUN transition of the
CPU. An FB call can also overwrite the parameters loaded directly from the parameter
configuration interface.
Downloading directly into the FM 355 is therefore only advisable when testing the parameter
configuration during commissioning.

If you change the parameters via the parameter configuration interface and then download
them directly into the FM 355, step changes can occur in the manipulated value course. In
order to achieve a controlled manipulated value course we recommend the following
procedure:
1. Switch to manual operation (for example via the loop display).
2. Change the parameters.
3. Download them directly into the FM 355
4. Switch to automatic operation (for example via the loop display).
Data Flow during Parameter Configuration via the Parameter Configuration Interface
The following figure shows the path of the parameter configuration data from the parameter
configuration interface to the FM 355.
3DUDPHWHU
DVVLJQPHQW
LQWHUIDFH
+:&RQILJ
3*
2IIOLQHGDWD
VWRUDJH
'RZQORDGLQJGLUHFWO\WR
WKH)0
'RZQORDG
IURP+:
&RQILJ
&38)0
6\VWHP
GDWD
'RZQORDGLQJWKHV\VWHP
GDWDDWVWDUWXS
6723!581 RIWKH&38
Figure 3-29 Parameter configuration of the FM 355 via the programming device and via the CPU

Connecting the FM 355 with the User Program

If you want to change controller parameters (for example controller gain, integration
coefficient) of the FM 355 from a user program or by operation at the programming device,
you have to use the PID_FM FB. You assign an instance data block to this FB for each
control channel that you want to use. If the LOAD_PAR parameter is set when the
PID_FM FB is called up via the user program, all the controller parameters of the FB are
transferred to the FM 355. Controller parameters are all the parameters that lie after the
cont_par variable in the instance data block.
The parameters in the instance DB have a default setting. These default settings can be
modified using the STL/LAD editor.
Note
In order to ensure that you do not overwrite the parameters that you do not want to change
by the default values from the instance DB, you must first call the PID_FM FB once with
COM_RST = TRUE during the CPU start-up. The PID_FB FB then reads the parameters -
that were transferred beforehand from the CPU into the FM - out of the FM 355 and places
them in its instance DB. You can now change individual parameters and transfer all the
parameters to the FM 355 with LOAD_PAR = TRUE.
Please note that the parameters in the FM 355 are always overwritten by the values from the
system data whenever the CPU is started up (transition from STOP to RUN).
&38)0
6\VWHP
GDWD
'RZQORDGLQJWKHV\VWHP
GDWDDWVWDUWXS
6723!581 RIWKH&38
,QVWDQFH'% )%
RIWKH)%b 3,'B)0
3,'B)0 /2$'B3$5 758(
&20B567 758(
Figure 3-30 Parameter configuration of the FM 355 via system data and via the PID_FM FB
The operating parameters (for example setpoint, manual manipulated value) are transferred
cyclically by the PID_FM FB to the FM 355. Operating parameters are all the parameters that
lie between the op_par and cont_par variables in the instance data block.
To ensure this is possible without any great time expenditure in the CPU, the transfer takes
place via direct peripheral access, not via the SFC WR_REC/SFB WRREC. Since only four
bytes are available per channel in the I/O address area of the module, the data are
multiplexed. It can therefore take up to three cycles of the CPU or of the FM 355 until the
operating values have been transferred to the FM 355 – the respectively longer cycle is
decisive.

If you set the parameter LOAD_OP = TRUE, then the operating parameters will be
transferred to the module in a program cycle via the SFC WR_REC/SFB WRREC. However,
this requires a higher run time (refer to the technical specifications).
The process values (for example, actual value, manipulated value) can also be read from the
PID_FM FB via direct I/O accesses. This transfer requires less run time, but entails the
functional limitations listed below. If the READ_VAR = TRUE parameter is set, then the
process values are read from the FM 355 via the SFC RD_REC/SFB RDREC. However, this
requires more run time.
Functional limitations if READ_VAR is not set:
• The SP (setpoint from the FM), ER (negative deviation), DISV (disturbance variable),
LMN_A and LMN_B variables are not updated.
• The data are multiplexed. The actual value and manipulated value as well as the binary
displays are not up-to-date until after the block has been called four times.
• If the setpoint and manual manipulated value were operated via the continuous-action
controller, these operating values are not updated (read from the FM) during the start-up
of the FB CPU.
Reference
Further information about using instance DBs is available in this documentation in the
sections "Including the FM 355 in the User Program" and "Assignment of DBs".
See also
Parameter assignment (Page 6-2)
Summary (Page 7-1)
Instance DB of the PID_FM FB (Page 11-1)
Assignment of the DBs for Operator Control and Monitoring via OP (Page 11-35)
Operator Control and Monitoring of the FM 355 via the PID_FM FB

Operator control and monitoring of the FM 355 is possible via the PID_FM FB.
If one of the following parameters "Operating setpoint SP_OP, Operating manipulated value
LMN_OP and the corresponding switches SP_OP_ON and LMNOP_ON" has been changed
through OP control, the PID_FM FB takes over these values from the FM after the CPU
start-up if the READ_VAR = TRUE parameter is set.
Operator Control and Monitoring of the FM 355 with the OP via MPI
You can establish a maximum of three connections from the FM 355 to OPs via MPI.
Operation of the FM 355 using the OP is only possible in the STOP state of the CPU or at a
CPU failure.
Monitoring of the FM 355 with the OP is always possible.

The variable interface of the FM 355 contains four data blocks with the block numbers 101 to
104 for the controller channels 1 to 4 (refer to the following figure).
Note
The contents of Data blocks 101 to 104 do not automatically mirror the parameter value
effective on the FM 355. Parameters changed using the OP are only taken over into the
FM 355 after the LOAD_PAR or LOAD_OP operating bit has been set.
If you change a parameter using OP operation without setting the corresponding operating
bit, the changed parameter value is entered in the data block, but the FM 355 continues to
operate internally with the unchanged old value of the parameter.
After the operating bits have been set and the parameters taken over into the FM 355, the
operating bits LOAD_PAR or LOAD_OP are reset by the FM 355.
23
2SHUDWHDQGPRQLWRUZKHQ 2SHUDWLRQRQO\ZKHQWKH&38LV
WKH&38LVLQ581 DW6723RULIWKH&38IDLOV
PRQLWRU
&38 )0
'%b
WR

0D[
)% LQVWDQFH
3,'B)0 '%VRIWKH
)%
3,'B)0
3DUDPHWHU

Figure 3-31 Operator control and monitoring of the FM.
* controlled by the READ_VAR parameter of the instance DB

** controlled by the LOAD_OP and LOAD_PAR parameters

3.7 Characteristics of the FM 355
3.7 3.7 Characteristics of the FM 355
Overview
The following topics contain information about
• The processing sequence and sampling time
• Rules for operation
• Startup reaction
• Backup mode
• Firmware update
Sequence of execution
The FM 355 executes the analog inputs and controller channels in a specified sequence.
Each controller channel is executed immediately after the execution and conditioning of the
analog input with the same number. Subsequently the analog input with the next highest
number will be processed and so on. The reference junction is processed after controller
channel 4. The following figure shows the sequence of execution of the FM 355.
&RQYHUVLRQWLPHVH[DPSOH
5HIHUHQFH PV
%RRW MXQFWLRQIRU
DQDORJLQSXWV
WR
&RQWUROOHU
$QDORJLQSXW PV FKDQQHOV

&RQWUROOHU
$QDORJLQSXW PV
FKDQQHOV

&RQWUROOHU

&RQWUROOHU
$QDORJLQSXW PV
FKDQQHOV

Figure 3-32 Sequence of execution of the FM 355 (four inputs used)

Sampling Time
The combined sampling time of all the controllers of the FM 355 results from the sum of the
conversion times of the individual analog inputs. The conversion time for the reference
junction is added, if it is used.
The conversion time of an analog input depends on the resolution, the line frequency and the
controller type used:
Table 3-4 Conversion time of an analog input
Resolution Line frequency Controller type Conversion time of an analog

input
12 bits 60 Hz No temperature controller 16 2/3 ms
12 bits 50 Hz No temperature controller 20 ms
14 bits 50 or 60 Hz No temperature controller 100 ms
12 or 14 bits 50 or 60 Hz Temperature controller 100 ms
If an analog input is not executed, the controller channel with the same number is also not
executed (conversion time = 0).
No additional conversion times result for the analog outputs. The analog output values of the
FM 355 are output immediately after the corresponding output value has been calculated.
The following table contains further rules for the conversion time of the reference junction
input.
Table 3-5 Rules for the conversion time
If ... Then ...

A resolution of 12 bits is selected at all the analog the reference junction requires the same
inputs, conversion time as an analog input.
The higher resolution of 14 bits has been
selected for even one analog input, the reference junction requires a conversion time
One of the controllers was configured as a of 100 ms.
temperature controller,
The sampling time is displayed in the parameter configuration interface: Module parameters
command button.
The following sampling time results for each controller in the example shown in the previous
figure (at 50 Hz line frequency):
tSample = 100 ms + 20 ms + 20 ms + 100 ms + 20 ms = 260 ms

The following figure shows an example of the sequence of execution at only three used
analog inputs.
&RQYHUVLRQWLPHVH[DPSOH
5HIHUHQFH PV
%RRW MXQFWLRQIRU
DQDORJLQSXWV
WR
&RQWUROOHU

&RQWUROOHU
$QDORJLQSXW PV
FKDQQHOV

&RQWUROOHU
$QDORJLQSXW 1RWXVHG FKDQQHOV
PV
&RQWUROOHU
$QDORJLQSXW PV
FKDQQHOV

Figure 3-33 Sequence of execution of the FM 355 (three inputs used)
The following sampling time results for each controller in the example shown in the previous
figure (at 50 Hz line frequency):
tSample = 20 ms + 20 ms + 20 ms + 0 ms + 20 ms = 80 ms
Rules for operating the FM 355

The following rules can be summarized for operation with the FM 355:
• The FM 355 controllers can be cascaded freely. This means that you can switch the
manipulated value of a controller channel to the setpoint value of another controller
channel.
• The execution of a controller channel is carried out immediately after the conditioning of
the analog input with the same number.
If a controller uses several analog inputs, you should select the controller channel whose
number corresponds to the highest number of the used analog inputs in order to reduce
the dead times.
Example: A controller requires the signals of Analog inputs 1, 2 and 3. The smallest dead
time results when Controller No. 3 is selected.
• If you select the setting "Analog input is not executed" at the analog input, the controller
channel with the same number is then also not executed. No additional sampling time is
thus required for this analog input.

• If the reference junction input is used, it requires the same conversion time as the analog
input with the highest conversion time.
• The sampling time of a controller is the sum of the conversion times of the used analog
inputs plus the conversion time of the reference junction input.
Startup Behavior
During the startup the FM 355 initially takes over the current parameters from its EEPROM
and starts to control with these parameters. These are overwritten by the CPU with
parameters from the system data as soon as the P-bus connection between the CPU and
the FM 355 is established. If the system data do not contain any parameters for the
controller, the module continues to control with the parameters stored in the EEPROM. A
change to default parameters is unknown to the FM 355.
The following configurable options are available for the manipulated value for a restart after a
power failure:
• The controller begins with the safety manipulated value.
This setting remains effective until it is reversed by the user program via the function
block.
• The controller goes into closed-loop control operation.
The following configurable options are available for the setpoint value for a restart after a
power failure:
• The last valid setpoint value remains effective.
• A changeover to the safety setpoint value take place.
This changeover is only effective if the setpoint value is specified by the user program via
the function block. Otherwise the setpoint value is specified either by an analog input or
by or controller output, depending on the parameter configuration.
Startup Behavior in an S7-300 and Own Power Supply of the FM 355

If the FM 355 in an S7-300 system has its own 24-V supply voltage that is independent of
the CPU, the communication connection of the CPU to the FM 355 is interrupted after a
failure and return of the 24-V supply voltage of the FM 355. This is indicated as follows:
• The RET_VALU output parameter has an error value in the PID_FM FB.
• The CPU does not change to the RUN state due to the "Parameter configuration error"
error cause.

In order to restore the communication between the CPU and the FM 355, proceed as follows
for the CPUs and devices listed below:
CPU/Device Order No.: Procedure

313 6ES7 313-1AD00-0AB0
314 6ES7 314-1AE00-0AB0
6ES7 314-1AE01-0AB0
314 IFM 6ES7 314-5AE00-0AB0
315 6ES7 315-1AF00-0AB0
315-2 DP 6ES7 315-2AF00-0AB0
614 6ES7 614-1AH00-0AB0
Turn the power supply for the CPU off
C7 -623 6ES7 623-1AE00-0AE3 and on again.
6ES7 623-1CE00-0AE3
C7 -624 6ES7 624-1AE00-0AE3
6ES7 624-1CE00-0AE3
C7 -626 6ES7 626-1AG00-0AE3
6ES7 626-2AG00-0AE3
6ES7 626-1CG00-0AE3
6ES7 626-2CG00-0AE3
Proceed as follows at the CPUs listed below:
CPU Order No.: Procedure

313 6ES7 313-1AD01-0AB0
314 6ES7 314-1AE02-0AB0
314 IFM 6ES7 314-5AE01-0AB0 Change the CPU to the STOP state and
then back to the RUN state.
315 6ES7 315-1AF01-0AB0
315-2 DP 6ES7 315-2AF01-0AB0
614 6ES7 614-1AH01-0AB0
The technological function of the FM 355 is not influenced by this communication fault. In
accordance with the parameter configuration the controllers of the FM 355 start up with one
of the following operating states:
• Controller operation
– Controlling with the safety setpoint value
– Controlling with the last valid setpoint value
• Manipulated value = Safety manipulated value

Backup mode
If the CPU goes into STOP or fails or if the connection of the FM 355 to the CPU fails, the
FM 355 goes into backup operation and continues to control with the parameters valid at the
moment of failure. The FM 355 uses either the last setpoint value or the safety setpoint
value. Depending on the parameter configuration.
Backup operation is indicated by the yellow "Backup" LED.
In backup operation the FM 355 can be operated directly via the OP. As soon as the CPU
has returned to RUN, the FM 355 can no longer be operated via the OP.
See also
Functional mechanisms and data storage in the FM 355 (Page 3-30)
Firmware update
In order to extend the functionality and eliminate errors, firmware updates can be
downloaded to the operating system memory of the FM 355. This functionality is described in
the online help of the parameter configuration interface.

3.8 Parameter optimization with temperature controllers
3.8 3.8 Parameter optimization with temperature controllers
Demands on the process in the case of temperature controllers

The process should fulfill the following requirements in order to achieve optimal control using
the temperature controller:
• At bath heatings the liquid to be heated has to be mixed thoroughly.
• In case of bath-in-bath control systems both liquids have to be mixed thoroughly. At the
same time good heat transitions between all the heat-transferring media have to be
ensured. In the case of materials with poor heat-transferring properties large transfer
surfaces should ensure good heat transportation.
• In case of room temperature control systems thorough mixing (for example with fans) has
to be ensured.
• The controlling system gain may not exceed the factor of 3.
• The delay time may not exceed 3% of the recovery time.
• The temperature to be controlled should change by a maximum of 1‰ of the specified
maximum temperature at the maximum manipulated value output within the sampling
time of the controller.
Classification of the Controlled Systems

A controlled system or a process to be controlled is characterized by parameters such as the
heat output, the heating mass or the heating capacity of the medium to be heated. With
regard to the fuzzy controller a difference is made between "critical" and "non-critical"
temperature controlled systems as follows: The control system becomes increasingly critical:
• The greater the heat output,
• the greater the heating capacity of the heating,
• The lower the heating capacity of the medium to be heated,
• the greater the heat transition resistance,
• the smaller the heat transfer surface.

After a manipulated value step change has been applied to the controlled system, it reacts
with a step response. The controlled system can also be classified on the basis of this step
response: The control system becomes increasingly critical the greater the ratio tu / ta is and
the greater the controlled system gain is. With tu / ta < 1/10 you have a non-critical control
section, refer to the following figure.
6WHSUHVSRQVHRID
FRQWUROOHGV\VWHPWRD
PDQLSXODWHGYDULDEOH
VWHSFKDQJH
WD W
WX
WX 'HOD\WLPH
WD %DODQFLQJWLPH
Figure 3-34 Step response of a controlled system to a manipulated value step change
Parameter Optimization at a Temperature Controller

Parameter optimization is based on a self-optimizing fuzzy controller.
In order for the temperature controller to operate optimally, the controlled system has to be
identified. To this purpose the identification has to be activated by means of the FUZID_ON =
1 parameter in the instance DB of the PID_FM function block and a setpoint value step
change of ≥12% of the maximum setpoint value carried out.
The identification of the controlled system begins with a monitoring phase during which no
heat output takes place. The duration of the monitoring phase is as follows:
• Monitoring phase continuous controller: Approx. 1 min
• Monitoring phase step controller: Approx. 1 min + 1/2 x actuating time of final control
element
This time is used in order to determine temperature trends in the heating medium.
Afterwards the maximum heating output of 100% is output. This is visible at the LMN output
parameter in the instance DB of the PID_FM function block.
The range of the first 4% of the temperature increase of the setpoint value range is used for
the identification, whereby information about the process response is obtained at 1% and 4%
respectively of the temperature increase on the basis of the time that has passed.

The identification is complete when the heating output becomes less than 100%. This
behavior can be used, for example, to deactivate the identification via the user program.
After the identification phase the controller continues to operate with the determined
parameters.
A renewed identification is carried out at every further setpoint value step change ≥12%
unless the identification has been deactivated again with FUZID_ON = FALSE.
If the setpoint value step change is not adjusted and if the heating output remains
permanently at zero, the identification has been terminated unsuccessfully, meaning that the
controller cannot control the connected controlled system.
Preconditions for the Identification

You have to ensure as far as possible that the controlled system has settled (no heating-up
or cooling-down process) or is changing slowly and monotonously before the identification is
carried out. The criterion can be that the temperature change is to approach a straight during
a period of one minute. At faster processes this requirement is particularly relevant.
Since the manipulated variable zero is output for approx. one minute by the controller at the
beginning of identification, the temperature to be controlled has to lie near the ambient
temperature.
How To Start Identification

In order to start identification you first have to switch the controller to the optimization mode.
This is done by setting the FUZID_ON bit in the instance DB of the PID_FM FB, either by the
user program or via the parameter configuration tool:
Call: Test >Controller optimization
The identification is started by a positive setpoint value step change, whereby the following
conditions have to be fulfilled:
• 1. Condition: The minimum step change size: Setpoint value step change > 5 degrees
• 2. Condition: The setpoint value after the step change:
Setpoint value after > Actual value + Setpoint value limit x 0.12
with setpoint value limit = Upper setpoint value limit of the controller
It is also possible to restart the identification by reducing and then increasing the setpoint
value. The setpoint value has to fulfill Condition 2 after it has been increased.
Completing the Identification

As long as the bit FUZID_ON = TRUE, the next identification is started whenever the setpoint
value step change is sufficiently large. We therefore recommend that the optimization mode
be deactivated immediately after the identification has been completed (FUZID_ON =
FALSE).
Information about the state of the identification is available through the IDSTATUS
parameter of the CH_DIAG FB.

Canceling Identification
Identification can be canceled in the following cases:
• By the controller if a "critical" controlled system is identified. After canceling the controller
is in the error state. This state is indicated by the fact that the manipulated variable is
reset permanently by the controller. This is also not changed by deactivating the
optimization. The error state is deleted by starting a new identification.
Information about the state of the identification is available through the IDSTATUS
parameter of the CH_DIAG FB.
• By the operator by generating a negative setpoint value step change, whereby the
setpoint value must lie below that of Condition 2 (see above "How To Start identification").
Note
Deactivation of the optimizing mode with FUZID_ON=0 before identification has been
completed does not stop the identification. An identification process that has been started
continues to run under all circumstances – with the exception of a negative setpoint value
step change.
Controller behavior with different control sections

Problems do not arise in case of an "uncritical" controlled system, neither during
identification nor during controlling.
The identification of a controlled system that is "too critical" is cancelled. Controlling of an
identified "critical" controlled system is carried out very "carefully" or slowly.
Controller State Information

The IDSTATUS parameter of the FB CH_DIAG function block supplies information about the
identification state.
; $ , )

Figure 3-35 IDSTATUS parameter of the CH_DIAG FB

The IDSTATUS parameter contains the four hexadecimal values X, A, I and F. They have
the following meaning:
X: Without meaning (always 0)

A: Action number:
0 = Manual operation (or no closed-loop control operation);
2 = Closed-loop control;
4 = Optimization activated (FUZID_ON = true);
6 = Transition state from manual operation to 2 or 4;
I: Display "Identification running" and "Parameters determined, but not yet stored in
EEPROM"
0 = Identification not running, no new parameters determined
1 = Identification running, no new parameters determined
2 = Identification not running, new parameters determined, but not yet stored in EEPROM
3 = Identification running, new parameters determined, but not yet stored in EEPROM
F: Error number:
0 = No error
4 = Excessive step change of the actual value during the identification
5 = Ratio of delay time to system time constant too large or strongly non-linear behavior of
the controlled system.
6= Temperature drop or rise during identification start too large. System not settled
sufficiently


Installing and Removing the FM 355 4
4.1 4.1 Preparing for Installation
Determining the Slots

The FM 355 function module occupies two slots. It can be installed like a signal module in
any of slots 4 to 11.
Mechanical Configuration
Manual /1/ describes the possibilities open to you for mechanical installation and how to
proceed when configuring. The following gives only a few supplementary notes.
1. A maximum of eight SMs or FMs are permissible per rack.
2. The maximum number is restricted by the width of the modules or the length of your
mounting rail. The FM 355 requires an installation width of 80 mm.
3. The maximum number is restricted by the total current consumptions of all modules to the
right of the CPU from the 5 V backplane bus supply. The typical current input of the
FM 355 from the 5 V backplane bus supply amounts to 50 mA.
4. The maximum number is also restricted by the memory required by the CPU software for
communications with the FM 355.
Vertical or Horizontal Arrangement

The horizontal rack installation should be used if possible. For vertical installation, you must
observe the restricted ambient temperatures (max. 40°C).
Determining the Start Address

The start address of the FM 355 is required for communication between the CPU and the
FM 355. The start address has to be entered into the instance DBs of the required FBs.
The entry is made either by using the STL/LAD editor or from the user program.
The start address of the FM 355 can be determined in accordance with the same rules as
the start address of an analog module.

Installing and Removing the FM 355
4.1 Preparing for Installation
Fixed Addressing
In fixed addressing the start address depends on the slot. The tables in Manual /1/ list the
respective start address of an analog module at the various slots.
You can also calculate this fixed start address by using the following equation:
Adr. = 256 + (Rack No. x 128) + (Slot No. - 4) x 16
Free Addressing
In free addressing you specify the start address for the module under STEP 7.
Important Safety Rules

There are important rules you must observe for integrating an S7-300 with an FM 355 into a
plant or a system. These rules and regulations are explained in Manual /1/.
Reference
Further information about addressing and configuring the instance DBs is available in this
documentation in the sections "Including the FM 355 in the User Program" and "Assignment
of DBs".
See also
Summary (Page 7-1)

4.2 Installing and Removing the FM 355
4.2 4.2 Installing and Removing the FM 355
Precautions
No special protection measures (ESD guidelines) are required for installing an FM 355.
Tools Required
You require a 4.5 mm screwdriver to install and remove the FM 355.
Installing the FM 355

The following section describes how to install the FM 355 on the mounting rail. Manual /1/
contains further notes on installing modules.
1. Switch the CPU to STOP mode.
2. A bus connector is enclosed with the FM 355. Plug this into the bus connector of the
module to the left of the FM 355. (The bus connector is located on the back and you may
have to loosen the neighboring module.)
3. Hang the FM 355 onto the rail and swing it down.
4. Tighten the screw on the FM 355 (tightening torque approximately 0.8 to 1.1 Nm).
If further modules are to be installed to the right of the FM 355, first connect the bus
connector of the next module to the right-hand backplane bus connector of the FM 355.
If the FM 355 is the last module in the rack, do not connect a bus connector.
5. Label the FM 355 with its slot number. Use the number wheel supplied with the CPU for
this purpose.
Manual /1/ describes the numbering scheme you must use and how to connect the slot
numbers.
6. Install the shield contact element
Removing the FM 355 or Replacing a Module

The following section describes how to remove the FM 355. Manual /1/ contains further
notes on removing modules.
1. Switch off the supply voltage L+ at the front connector.
2. Switch the CPU to STOP mode.
3. Open the front door panels. If necessary, remove the labeling strips.
4. Release the front connectors and pull them out.
5. Loosen the fixing screws on the module.
6. Swing the module out of the mounting rail and unhook it.
7. Install the new module if applicable.
Further Information
Manual /1/ contains further notes on installing and removing modules.

4.2 Installing and Removing the FM 355

Wiring the FM 355 5
5.1 5.1 Terminal assignment of the front connectors
FM 355 C front connectors

The digital inputs, the analog inputs and outputs and the power supply of the module are
connected via the two 20-pin front connectors of the FM 355 C.
The following figure shows the front of the module, a front connector and the inside of the
front panels with the pin assignments.
)0&
3,'&RQWURO
6)
,F
/

,Fದ

9
ದ
,F

,Fದ

9

ದ

&+
,F
"
&+
,Fದ

"
9 &+
ದ
,F
"
&+
,Fದ

"
9

ದ
0$1$
0
9+$(

Figure 5-1 Terminal assignment of the front connectors of the FM 355 C
① Front view of the module

② Front connectors
③ Terminal assignment of the left-hand front connector
④ Terminal assignment of the right-hand front connector

Wiring the FM 355
5.1 Terminal assignment of the front connectors
Front Connector Assignment of the FM 355 C
Table 5-1 Terminal assignment of the front connectors of the FM 355 C
Left-hand front connector Right-hand front connector

Conne Analog Name Function Conne Analog Name Function
ction input ction output
1 – – – 1 – L+ 24 V DC supply voltage
2 1 IC+ Constantcurrent line (pos.) 2 – I1 Digital input
3 IC– Constantcurrent line (neg.) 3 – I2 Digital input
4 M+: Measuring line (pos.) 4 – I3 Digital input
5 M– Measuring line (neg.) 5 – I4 Digital input
6 2 IC +: Constantcurrent line (pos.) 6 – I5 Digital input
10 – COMP+ Reference junction input 10 – – –
(pos.)
11 – COMP– Reference junction input 11 1 Q1 Analog output
(neg.)
12 3 IC +: Constantcurrent line (pos.) 12 MANA Reference point of the analog
circuit
13 IC– Constantcurrent line (neg.) 13 2 Q2 Analog output
14 M+: Measuring line (pos.) 14 MANA Reference point of the analog
circuit
15 M– Measuring line (neg.) 15 3 Q3 Analog output
16 4 IC +: Constantcurrent line (pos.) 16 MANA Reference point of the analog
circuit
17 IC– Constantcurrent line (neg.) 17 4 Q4 Analog output
18 M+: Measuring line (pos.) 18 MANA Reference point of the analog
circuit
19 M– Measuring line (neg.) 19 – – –
20 – MANA Reference point of the 20 – M Mass of the supply voltage
analog circuit 24 V DC
Note
The MANA connections have to be connected with low impedance to the central ground
connection. If you supply the encoders externally, you must also connect the ground of this
external voltage with the ground of the CPU.

Wiring the FM 355
FM 355 S front connectors

The analog inputs, the digital inputs and outputs and the power supply of the module are
connected via the two 20-pin front connectors of the FM 355 S.
The following figure shows the front of the module, a front connector and the inside of the
front panels with the pin assignments.
)06
3,'&RQWURO
6)
/
,F

,Fದ

9
ದ
,F

,Fದ

9

ದ

,F

,Fದ

9
ದ
,F

,Fದ

9

ದ
0$1$
0
9+$(

Figure 5-2 Terminal assignment of the front connectors of the FM 355 S
① Front view of the module

② Front connectors
③ Terminal assignment of the left-hand front connector
④ Terminal assignment of the right-hand front connector

Wiring the FM 355
Front Connector Assignment of the FM 355 S
Table 5-2 Terminal assignment of the front connectors of the FM 355 S

Con- Analog Name Function Con- Con- Name Function
nection input nection troller
chan-
nel
1 – – – 1 – L+ 24 V DC supply voltage
10 – COMP Reference junction input 10 – – –
+: (pos.)
11 – COMP Reference junction input 11 1 Q1 Digital output
– (neg.) At step controllers: Manipulated value
signal up
At pulse controllers: Manipulated value
A
12 3 IC +: Constantcurrent line (pos.) 12 Q2 Digital output
At step controllers: Actuating Signal
Down
B
13 IC– Constantcurrent line (neg.) 13 2 Q3 Digital output
At step controllers: Manipulated value
signal up
A
14 M+: Measuring line (pos.) 14 Q4 Digital output
Down
B
15 M– Measuring line (neg.) 15 3 Q5 Digital output
signal up
A

Wiring the FM 355

Con- Analog Name Function Con- Con- Name Function
nection input nection troller
chan-
nel
16 4 IC +: Constantcurrent line (pos.) 16 Q6 Digital output
Down
B
17 IC– Constantcurrent line (neg.) 17 4 Q7 Digital output
signal up
A
18 M+: Measuring line (pos.) 18 Q8 Digital output
Down
B
19 M– Measuring line (neg.) 19 – – –
20 – MANA Reference point of the 20 – M Mass of the supply voltage 24 V DC
analog circuit
Note
The MANA connection has to be connected with low impedance to the central ground
connection. If you supply the encoders externally, you must also connect the ground of this
external voltage with the ground of the CPU.
Supply voltage L+/M

Connect a direct voltage of 24 V to the L+ and M terminals for the power supply of the
modules and of the digital outputs.
Caution
Only extra low voltage ≤ 60 V DC separated safely from the system may be used for the 24
V DC power supply. Safe isolation can be implemented by one of the following requirements:
• VDE 0100 Part 410 / HD 384-4-41 / IEC 364-4-41 (as functional low voltage with safe
isolation)
• VDE 0805 / EN 60950 / IEC 950 (as safety extra-low voltage SELV)
• VDE 0106 Part 101
An integral diode protects the module from reverse polarity of the supply voltage.

Wiring the FM 355
Input Filters for Digital Inputs

In order to suppress disturbances, digital inputs I1 to I8 have input filters (RC elements) with
a uniform filter time of 1.5 ms.
Digital outputs
The FM 355 S disposes of eight digital outputs, Q1 to Q8, that are used to directly trigger
control processes.
The digital outputs are supplied via the supply voltage L+.
The digital outputs are source outputs and can be loaded with a load current of 0.1 A. They
are protected from overload and short-circuit.
Note
Direct connection of inductivities (such as relays and contactors) is possible without external
circuiting. If SIMATIC output circuits can be deactivated by additionally installed contacts (for
example relay contacts), you have to provide additional overvoltage protection devices at
inductivities (see the following example for overvoltage protection).
Overvoltage Protection Example

The following figure shows an output circuit that requires additional overvoltage protection
devices.
6,0$7,&6
FRQWURO
&RQWDFWLQWKHRXWSXWFLUFXLW
,QGXFWDQFHUHTXLUHVDFLUFXLW
UHIHUWRILJXUHEHORZ
Figure 5-3 Relay contact in the output circuit

Wiring the FM 355
Circuiting of Coils Operated with DC Voltage

Direct-current coils are circuited with diodes or Zener diodes.
ZLWKGLRGH ZLWK=HQHUGLRGH
+ +
- -
Figure 5-4 Circuiting of coils operated with DC voltage
Wiring with diodes / Zener diodes

Diode/Zener diode circuits have the following characteristics:
• Opening overvoltages can be avoided totally. Zener diodes have higher interruption
voltages.
• Long switch-off delay (6 to 9 times longer than without a protective circuit). Zener diodes
switch off faster than diode circuits.

Wiring the FM 355
5.2 Wiring front connectors
5.2 5.2 Wiring front connectors
Cables
Here are some rules for you to observe when selecting cables:
• The cables for Digital inputs I1 to I8 have to be shielded if the length exceeds 600 m.
• The cables for the analog signals have to be shielded.
• You must apply the shields of the analog signal cables both at the encoder and in the
immediate vicinity of the module via the shield contact element, for example.
The following figure shows details for the connection of analog signals.
6KLHOGRQWKHVKLHOG 6KLHOGRQ
FRQWDFWHOHPHQW KRXVLQJ
)URQWFRQQHFWRU
FRQQHF
WLRQ

0 $1$

&DEOHVWZLVWHG
Figure 5-5 Connection of analog signals
Terminal 20 (MANA) of the front connector has to be connected with low impedance to the
CPU ground. If you supply the encoder with an external voltage, you must also connect the
ground of this external voltage with the CPU ground.
• Use flexible cables with cross-sections of 0.25 to 1.5 mm2.
• You do not need wire end ferrules. If you use wire end ferrules then use only those
without insulation collar in accordance with DIN 46228 Form A, short version!
Note
Analog inputs that are not used are to be short-circuited and connected to MANA.

Wiring the FM 355
5.2 Wiring front connectors
Wiring
Proceed as follows when wiring the front connector:
1. Place the front connector in the wiring position and open the front panel.
2. Strip the conductors (length 6 mm).
3. Do you want to use end ferrules?
If yes: Press the end ferrules and the cables together.
4. Feed the enclosed strain relief clamp into the front connector.
5. If the wires leave the module at the bottom, begin wiring at the bottom, otherwise begin at
the top. Also screw tight unassigned terminals (tightening torque 0.6 to 0.8 Nm).
6. Tighten the strain relief clamp for the cable chain.
7. Push the front connector into the operating position.
8. Apply the cable shields to the shield contact element or to the shield bar.
9. Label the terminals on the labeling strip.
The following figure shows the module with the shielded cables and the shield contact
element.
Figure 5-6 Connection of the shielded cables to the FM 355

Wiring the FM 355
5.3 Module Status After First Being Switched On
5.3 5.3 Module Status After First Being Switched On
Characteristics
The state in which the module is after the power supply has turned on and when data have
not been transferred yet (state of delivery) is characterized by the following:
• Analog inputs: No execution
• Analog outputs (continuous-action controller): 0 mA
• Digital outputs (step controller): Zero (deactivated)
• No controller active
• Diagnostic interrupt disabled

Parameter Configuration of the FM 355 6
6.1 6.1 Installing the Parameterization Interface
Prerequisites
STEP 7 must be correctly installed on your PG / PC.
Delivery format
The software is delivered on CD ROM.
Procedure
To install the software:
1. Place the CD in the CD drive of your PG / PC.
2. Under Windows 95 / NT, launch the dialog for installing software by double-clicking on
the "Software" icon in "Control panel".
3. In the dialog box, select the CD drive and then the setup.exe file and start installation
process.
4. Follow the on-screen step-by-step instructions of the installation program.
The following will be installed on your PG / PC:
• Parameterization interface
• Function blocks
• Program examples
• Online help
Program examples
The program examples can be found in the STEP 7 catalog in the sub-catalog "Examples" in
the project FM_PIDEx.
Reading the Readme file

Important up-to-date information about the provided software can be found in a Readme file.
This file is located in the start window of the SIMATIC Manager.

Parameter Configuration of the FM 355
6.2 Configuring the hardware
6.2 6.2 Configuring the hardware
Procedure
Configuration assumes that you have set up a project in which you can save the
configuration. Refer to the Basic Software for S7 and M7, STEP 7 user manual for more
information on configuring modules. The following briefly explains the most important steps.
1. Launch the SIMATIC Manager and then call the configuration table in your project.
2. Select a subrack and arrange this.
3. Open the subrack.
4. Select the FM 355 from the module catalog.
5. Drag the FM 355 to the respective line of the configuration table.
6. From the configuration table, note the input address of the module, e.g. 272.
The value that you read off is displayed in decimal format.
6.3 6.3 Parameter assignment
Procedure
After configuration, you can start with the parameter assignment.
When assigning parameters you set the module parameters.
1. Double click on the order number of the module in the configuration table or select the
module and use the menu command Edit > Object properties.
Result: You end up in the "Properties" dialog box.
2. Click on the "Basic parameters" tab.
Result: You end up in the "Basic parameters" dialog box.
3. Parameterize the basic parameters of the module.
4. Click on "Parameter ...".
Result: You end up in the parameterization interface.
5. Parameterize the module and save the parameters entered with File > Save.
6. End the parameterization interface:
7. Save your project in the HW Config with Station > Save and compile.
8. Transfer the parameter data with the CPU in STOP mode by selecting Target system >
Load > Project.
Result: The data is located in the CPU´s memory and will be directly transferred from
there to the module.
9. Carry out a CPU start-up.

6.3 Parameter assignment
What you should note with parameterization.

The controller module checks the parameters only to the point at which a secure module
function is guaranteed. This applies, e.g. for parameters that are used for address
generation, as well as for time-dependent variables (e.g integration time constants > half
scanning time). When the controller module detects a parameterization error, then an entry
is made in the DS0 and DS1 of the module and the red error LED lights up. You can read off
parameterization errors in the Target system > Parameterization error display menu of the
parameterization interface.
Further tests for established thresholds or plausibility (e.g. upper limit > lower limit) are not
carried out.
In the parameterization interface you can select the assignment between inputs and
controller channels as well as between controller channels and outputs. Note the following:
Note
The parameterization tool does not provide an error message if when assigning the
controller channels to the inputs you assign two channels to one input.
Integrated help
Included in the parameterization interface is an integrated help that supports you in the
parameterization of the controller module. You have the following possibilities of calling the
integrated help:
• Via the menu command Help > Help topics ...
• By pressing the F1 key
• By clicking on the help button in the individual parameterization screens
The integrated help´s description of the parameterization of the module goes into more detail
than that of the manual.
See also
Diagnostics Records DS0 and DS1 (Page 12-2)

6.3 Parameter assignment

Implementing the FM 355 in the User Program 7
7.1 7.1 Summary
Overview
The following topics contain all the information required to program the FM 355 in the
S7-300.
Seven STEP 7 blocks are provided in order to implement the FM 355 in a user program.
These allow simple handling of the desired functions.
This chapter describes the following blocks:
• PID_FM FB for operator control and monitoring via the CPU as well as online modification
of controller parameters
• FB FUZ_355 for reading and writing the parameters of all temperature controllers of the
FM 355. The block enables a fast adaptation of the controller to changes in the control
section, and a parameterization of the temperature controllers after a module
replacement or new identification.
• FORCE355 FB for simulation (forcing) of the analog and digital input value (to support
commissioning).
• READ_355 FB for reading out the digital and analog input values (to support
commissioning).
• A CH_DIAG FB for reading out further channel-specific parameters (to support
commissioning)
• The FB 39 PID_PAR for changing other parameters online.
• The FB 40 CJ_T_PAR for changing the configured reference junction temperature online.
Note
FB 39 and FB 40 from the FM_PID "FM 355, 455 PID Control" library do not run under
S7 300 CPUs with a Micro Memory Card. If you use a CPU with a PROFINET
connection, take the respective blocks from the FM_PID "FM 355 PROFINET" library,
otherwise you must use the FB 29 and the FB 30.
You will find the description of the FB 29 and FB 30 blocks in the Appendix.

Implementing the FM 355 in the User Program
7.2 The function block PID_FM
7.2 7.2 The function block PID_FM
Use
The FM 355 is connected to the user program by means of the PID_FM FB. With this FB you
can change operating parameters during operation. You can, for example, specify a setpoint
value and the manipulated value or switch over to external manipulated value specification.
The data required for the PID_FM FB are stored in an instance DB on the CPU. The PID_FM
FB reads data program-controlled from the FM 355 and writes data program-controlled to the
FM 355.
The individual parameters are described in the online help and in the "Assignment of DBs"
section.
Creating and Supplying an Instance DB

Before you program the module with the user program, you have to create an instance DB
and supply it with important data for each controller channel that you want to use.
1. Use STEP 7 to create the instance DBs for the controller channels as data blocks with an
assigned PID_FM function block.
2. Enter the module address in the MOD_ADDR parameter at every instance DB.
The module address of the FM 355 is specified during the configuration of your hardware.
Take over the start address from HW Config.
3. Enter the channel number of the corresponding controller channel (1, 2, 3, or 4) in the
CHANNEL parameter at every instance DB.
4. Save the instance DBs.
Call
The PID_FM FB has to be called in the same OB as all the other FBs that access the same
FM 355.
The PID_FM FB is normally called in the watchdog interrupt OB 35. It requires an
initialization run that is started by setting the COM_RST = TRUE parameter in the start-up of
the CPU. Calling of an FB in the start-up OB is possible, but not necessary. After the
initialization run the PID_FM FB sets the COM_RST parameter to FALSE.

7.2.1 Operator Control via the PID_FM FB
Transfer of the Operating Parameters

The operating parameters (for example setpoint, manual manipulated value) are transferred
cyclically by the PID_FM FB to the FM 355. Operating parameters are all the I/O parameters
that lie between the op_par and cont_par parameters in the instance data block of the
function block.
In order to allow data transfer without high run times in the CPU, transfer is normally (when
LOAD_OP = FALSE) carried out via direct I/O accesses. Since only four bytes are available
per channel in the I/O address area of the module, the data are multiplexed. It can therefore
take up to three cycles of the CPU or of the FM 355 until the operating values have been
transferred to the FM 355 and become effective there – the respectively longer cycle is
decisive.
If you want the operating values to be transferred immediately (in one cycle of the CPU or of
the FM 355) to the FM 355, you can set the LOAD_OP parameter to TRUE. The
transmission then takes place by means of SFC WR_REC/SFB RDREC, the FB requires
more time for this (refer to Appendix A.2 "Technical specifications of function blocks"). After
a successful data transfer the LOAD_OP parameter of the PID_FM FB is reset to FALSE.
This can take a few call cycles if the FM 355 is used in distributed I/Os.
7.2.2 Monitoring via the PID_FM FB
Reading the Process Values

The FB PID_FM cyclically reads the process values (e.g. process value, manipulated
variable) from the FM 355. Process values are all the output parameters of the function block
after the out_par parameter.
The PID_FM FB also reads the process values via direct I/O accesses if READ_VAR =
FALSE. This transfer requires less run time, but entails the functional limitations listed below.
If the READ_VAR = TRUE parameter is set, then the process values are read from the FM
355 via the SFC RD_REC/SFB RDREC. However, this requires a higher run time (refer to
the technical specifications). After a successful data transfer the READ_VAR parameter of
the PID_FM FB is reset to FALSE. This can take a few call cycles if the FM 355 is used in
distributed I/Os.
Function at READ_VAR = TRUE

If one of the following parameters "Operating setpoint SP_OP, Operating manipulated value
LMN_OP and the corresponding switches SP_OP_ON" and "LMNOP_ON" has been
changed through OP control, the PID_FM FB takes over these values from the FM 355 after
the CPU start-up.

Functional Limitiations at READ_VAR = FALSE

• The SP (setpoint from the FM), ER (negative deviation), DISV (disturbance variable),
LMN_A and LMN_B parameters are not read from the FM.
• The data are multiplexed. The actual value, manipulated value and binary displays are
updated during every fourth call of the block.
• If the setpoint and manual manipulated value were operated via the MPI, these operating
values are not read from the FM during the start-up of the FB CPU.
Note
Multiplexing of the data to be transferred during access to the FM 355 via direct I/O
accresses is controlled via the PID_FM FB. This multiplex controlling does not function if
two instances of the PID_FM FB access the same channel number of a module. This
results in incorrect parameters in the FM 355 (for example setpoint value and manual
manipulated value) and incorrect displays of the PID_FM FB at its output parameters.
Error Displays
The output parameter, RET_VALU, contains the feedback value RET_VAL of the SFCs
RD_REC and WR_REC. With the blocks for PROFINET operation, the RET_VAL includes
the 2nd and 3rd bytes of the STATUS parameter of the SFB RDREC and WRREC.
RET_VAL can be evaluated if the parameters READ_PAR and LOAD_PAR are not reset.
The values of RET_VALU are described in the reference manual /2/.
An I/O access error can occur when the PID_FM FB is called, if the FM 355 is not plugged or
is not supplied with voltage. In this case the CPU changes to STOP mode if no OB 122 is
loaded in the CPU.
See also

7.2.3 Changing Controller Parameters Using the PID_FM FB
Procedure
Controller parameters (such as controller gain, integration coefficient) are all the I/O
parameters that lie after the cont_par parameter in the instance DB of the function block.
Controller parameters are first configured via the parameter configuration interface and
transferred via the system data to the FM 355.
Changing controller parameters using the PID_FM FB is advisable if you want to change
these during operation depending on the process states. Proceed as follows:
1. Set the COM_RST parameter of the FB PID_FM to TRUE in the start-up of the CPU.
The FB then reads all the controller parameters from the FM 355 and places them in its
instance DB. The instance DB of the PID_FM FB is now compared with the parameters of
the parameter configuration interface (system data). After successful reading of the
parameters the PID_FM FB sets the COM_RST parameter to FALSE. This can take a few
call cycles if the FM 355 is used in distributed I/Os.
2. If COM_RST = FALSE, you can now change individual controller parameters in the
instance DB of the PID_FM FB in the user program.
To do so call the PID_FM FB by setting LOAD_PAR = TRUE. The PID_FM FB then
transfers all the controller parameters from the instance DB to the FM. After successful
transfer of the parameters the PID_FM FB resets the LOAD_PAR parameter. This can
take a few call cycles if the FM 355 is used in distributed I/Os.
Note
Please note that the parameters in the FM 355 are always overwritten by the values from the
system data whenever the CPU is started up (transition from STOP to RUN).
See also
Operator Control and Monitoring of the FM 355. (Page 3-33)

7.2.4 Changing controller parameters via the OP
Procedure
If you want to change controller parameters of the PID_FM FB at the OP, proceed as follows:
1. Write the parameters that are to be changed from the OP into an auxiliary DB (see ①).
2. Do not transfer these parameters that are to be changed from the auxiliary DB into the
instance DB of the PID_FM FB until after the initialization of the PID_FM FB triggered by
COM_RST = TRUE (see ②) has been carried out (see ③).
3. Transfer the parameters to the controller module by setting LOAD_PAR (see ④).
Storage of the parameters in an auxiliary DB is necessary, because, after the start-up of the
CPU with COM_RST = TRUE, the PID_FM FB reads those parameters from the module that
the CPU had transferred beforehand from the system data to the FM.
&38 23
$X[LOLDU\'%

DIWHULQLWLDOL]DWLRQZLWK
&20B567 758(
)0
,QVWDQFH'% )%
RIWKH)%b 3,'B)0 /2$'B3$5 758(
3,'B)0
&20B567 758(
6\VWHP
GDWD 'RZQORDGLQJWKHV\VWHP
GDWDVWDUWXS
6723 ൺ 581 2IWKH&38
Figure 7-1 07_01_Changing controller parameters via OP
If COM_RST = TRUE is set, the CHANNEL parameter is also checked. If an invalid channel
number was configured at the CHANNEL parameter, the outputs QMOD_F and QCH_F are
set, COM_RST remains set and no further action of the FB is carried out.

If no error is found during the check and the parameters were read successfully from the
module, the COM_RST parameter is reset by the PID_FM FB.
Note
If the FB is called at the first call with COM_RST = FALSE and an invalid channel number is
configured at the MOD_ADDR or CHANNEL parameters, the FB accesses an incorrect I/O
address without any further check.
7.2.5 Saving the parameters in EEPROM
Principle
In the case of program-controlled reconfiguration (LOAD_PAR, LOAD_OP) of the controller
module by the FB PID_FM, the time thereof increases. The new parameters are always
immediately effective and are also stored in a non-volatile memory (EEPROM). After saving
the parameters in the EEPROM, any resaving is delayed by 30 minutes as the life span of
the EEPROM is restricted by the number of write operations. After recovery of the supply
voltage, it is possible to immediately save new parameters in EEPROM. Whether the
reconfiguration of the controller module takes place by the FB PID_FM shock-free depends
on the choice of the parameters.
7.2.6 Relationship between FB parameters and the parameterization interface
Overview
The following figures show the relationship between the PID_FM FB and the parameter
configuration interface of the controller module.
The parameters act at the same point at three-component controllers and ratio/blending
controllers as at fixed setpoint or cascade controllers. This also applies for the parameters
that exist equally at continuous-action controllers, at controllers with a pulse output as well
as at step controllers. As a rule the same command buttons also contain the same
parameters. Therefore, in order to obtain a clearly structured overview not all the structure
screens are shown and not all the parameters are drawn in all the screens.
However, the parameters of the PID_FM FB are contained in all the figures – with the
exception of the parameters MOD_ADDR, CHANNEL, QMOD_F, QPARA_F, QCH_F,
QLMNR_ON, RET_VALU, COM_RST, LOAD_PAR, READ_VAR, LOAD_OP.

At which points do the parameters of the PID_FM FB act?

The following figures show at which points in the module the parameters of the PID_FM FB
act.
63B+/0
63B23
63B//0
(IIHFWLYHVHW
63B5( SRLQW
6ZLWFKLQJ 5DPS /LPLWLQJ
VDIHW\VHW
6HWSRLQW SRLQW (UURU
VLJQDO
63B23B21 +B$/0
021(56(/ +B:51
/B:51
/B$/0
$ODUP
+<6
SURFHVV
YDOXH
'LQSXW
'B(/B6(/
'LVWXUEDQFH
YDULDEOH
Figure 7-2 Negative deviation generation at fixed setpoint or cascade controller
)8=,'B21
HIIHFWLYHVHWSRLQW
HIIHFWLYHSURFHVVYDOXH
7HPSHUDWXUH
FRQWUROOHU HIIHFWLYHPDQLSXODWHG
YDULDEOH
*$,1 70B/$*
7, 3B6(/
'($'%B: 7' 3)'%B6(/
(UURUVLJQDO
'HDG]RQH
'LQSXW
'LVWXUEDQFHYDULDEOH

/01B5( /01B5(21 /0123B21

H[WHUQDO
PDQLSXODWHG
YDULDEOH /01B23 6$)(B21 /01B+/0
/01B6$)( /01B//0
0DQLSXODWHG 0DQLSXODWHGYDULDEOH$
HIIHFWLYH 6ZLWFK YDULDEOH
/0175.21
YDULDEOH PDQLSXODWHG
YDOXH 6ZLWFKLQJ /LPLWLQJ 6SOLWUDQJH
VDIHW\
PDQLSXODWHG
YDULDEOH
6ZLWFK
FRUUHFWLRQ 0DQLSXODWHGYDULDEOH%
&RUUHFWLRQLQSXW
0DQLSXODWHGYDULDEOH
IROORZXS
H[WHUQDO
PDQLSX
ODWHG
YDULDEOH
HIIHFWLYH 6ZLWFK 38/6(B70

PDQLSX H[WHUQDO %5($.B70

PDQLSXODWHG
YDULDEOH
&RUUHFWLRQLQSXW

H[WHUQDO
PDQLSX
ODWHG
YDULDEOH
HIIHFWLYH 6ZLWFK
PDQLSX H[WHUQDO 075B70
0DQLSXODWHG 38/6(B70
ODWHG PDQLSX
YDULDEOH %5($.B70
YDULDEOH ODWHGYDOXH

FRUUHFWLRQ VDIHW\ 3XOVH
PDQLSXODWHG VKDSHU
YDULDEOH
&RUUHFWLRQLQSXW
feedback)
/01'1B23
/0183B23
/0162321
/0156B21
075B70 $FWXDWLQJ
38/6(B70 VLJQDO
%5($.B70
KLJK
/01569$/
H[WHUQDOPDQLSXODWHG
YDULDEOH
ORZ

PDQLSX H[WHUQDO VDIHW\ VKDSHU
ODWHG PDQLSX PDQLSXODWHG
YDULDEOH ODWHGYDOXH YDULDEOH /015+65(
/015/65(
feedback)

At which points are the parameters of the PID_FM FB generated?

The following figures show at which points in the module the output parameters of the
PID_FM FB are generated.
4835/0 463+/0
63B23
4'15/0 463//0
63B5( (IIHFWLYHVHW
&3 SRLQW
6ZLWFKLQJ 5DPS /LPLWLQJ (5
VDIHW\VHW
6HWSRLQW SRLQW (UURU
VLJQDO
39
4+B$/0
4632321 4+B:51
4/B:51
4/B$/0
$ODUP
SURFHVVYDOXH
'LQSXW
',69
'LVWXUEDQFH
YDULDEOH
Figure 7-8 Negative deviation generation at fixed setpoint or cascade controller
463/(39 4)8==<
HIIHFWLYHVHWSRLQW
HIIHFWLYHSURFHVVYDOXH
7HPSHUDWXUH
FRQWUROOHU HIIHFWLYHPDQLSXODWHG
YDULDEOH
3,'
(UURUVLJQDO
'HDG]RQH
'LQSXW
'LVWXUEDQFHYDULDEOH

4/012321
H[WHUQDO 4/015(
PDQLSXODWHG
YDULDEOH 4/01B+/0
/01B23
4/016$)( 4/01B//0 /01 4635
0DQLSXODWHG
HIIHFWLYH 6ZLWFK YDULDEOH /01B$
YDULDEOH PDQLSXODWHG 4/0175. 0DQLSXODWHG
YDOXH 6ZLWFKLQJ /LPLWLQJ 6SOLWUDQJH YDULDEOH$
VDIHW\
PDQLSXODWHG /01B%
6ZLWFK YDULDEOH
FRUUHFWLRQ 0DQLSXODWHG
YDULDEOH%
&RUUHFWLRQLQSXW
H[WHUQDO
PDQLSX
ODWHG
YDULDEOH
HIIHFWLYH 6ZLWFK
PDQLSX H[WHUQDO
4/0183
4/01'1
PDQLSXODWHG
YDULDEOH
&RUUHFWLRQLQSXW

H[WHUQDO
PDQLSX
ODWHG
YDULDEOH
HIIHFWLYH 6ZLWFK
PDQLSX H[WHUQDO
ODWHG PDQLSX 0DQLSXODWHG 4/015+6
YDULDEOH ODWHGYDOXH YDULDEOH 4/015/6

FRUUHFWLRQ VDIHW\ 3XOVH
PDQLSXODWHG VKDSHU
YDULDEOH
&RUUHFWLRQLQSXW 4/01'1
4/0183
/01B$
feedback)
4/015+6
4/015/6
H[WHUQDOPDQLSXODWHG
YDULDEOH 4/0183
4/01'1
PDQLSX H[WHUQDO VDIHW\ VKDSHU
ODWHG PDQLSX PDQLSXODWHG
feedback)
See also

7.3 The FUZ_355 function block
7.3 7.3 The FUZ_355 function block
Use
The FUZ_355 FB is used for the temperature controller of the FM 355 (fuzzy controller). This
FB can be used to read and write the parameters of all the temperature controllers of the
FM 355. This function is suitable for the following applications:
• Transfer of the controller parameters determined through identification to the FM 355
after module replacement
• Adapting the FM 355 to different controlled systems
Note
You may not change the parameters determined through identification by the FM 355 since
they have been optimized for the process.
The FUZ_355 FB does not require an initialization run.

and supply it with important data.
1. Use STEP 7 to create the instance DB as a data block with an assigned FUZ_355
function block.
2. Enter the module address in the MOD_ADDR parameter at the instance DB.
3. Save the instance DB.
Call
The FUZ_355 FB has to be called in the same OB as all the other FBs that access the same
FM 355.

7.3 The FUZ_355 function block
Using the FM FUZ_355

When you have carried out an identification of the temperature controllers and the controllers
control with satisfactory results, call the FUZ_355 FB and set the READ_PAR parameter to
TRUE.
The FB then reads the parameters of all four temperature controllers of the FM 355 and
places them in the instance DB. After the temperature controller parameters have been read
out successfully, the FUZ_355 FB sets the READ_PAR parameter to FALSE. This can take a
few call cycles if the FM 355 is used in distributed I/Os. You should therefore call the FB
conditionally after READ_PAR has been set as long as READ_PAR = TRUE.
You should set the LOAD_PAR parameter of the FUZ_355 FB in the start-up of the CPU and
then call the block conditionally in the cyclic program as long as LOAD_PAR = TRUE. If the
LOAD_PAR = TRUE parameter is set, then the FB writes the parameters of all the
temperature controllers of the FM 355 from the instance DB to the FM 355. After a
successful transmission of the parameters, the FB PID_FM sets the LOAD_PAR parameter
to FALSE. This can take a few call cycles if the FM 355 is used in distributed I/Os.
When the temperature controller parameters are read, a parameter configuration error of the
temperature controller parameters is displayed in the PARAFFUZ parameter as follows:
High byte of PARAFFUZ not euqal to zero means that a parameter configuration error exists.
The low byte contains the byte offset of the incorrect parameter, referenced to the beginning
of the static variables. For example, PARAFFUZ = W#16#0104 means that the second
parameter is incorrect.
The error display can only be displayed if you manipulate the temperature controller
parameters in the instance DB and write to the FM 355. You can also read out these
parameter assignment errors by using the PLC > Parameter Assignment Error menu of the
parameter configuration interface.
RET_VALU can be evaluated if the parameters READ_PAR and LOAD_PAR are not reset.
See also
Instance DB of the FUZ_355 FB (Page 11-20)

7.4 The FORCE355 function block
7.4 7.4 The FORCE355 function block
Use
The FORCE355 FB is used to simulate (force) the analog and digital input values to support
commissioning.
The FORCE355 FB does not require an initialization run. It is normally called cyclically.

1. Use STEP 7 to create the instance DB as a data block with an assigned FORCE355
function block.
Call
The FORCE355 FB has to be called in the same OB as all the other FBs that access the
same FM 355.
Simulating Analog Values

Simulation of the analog values for channels one to four is activated via the switches
S_AION[ i ] or S_PVON[ i ], whereby 1 ≤ i ≤ 4. The following figure shows at which point the
simulated analog value is effective.
The simulation values for the channels one to four are specified via the parameters PV_SIM[
i ].
You can have the simulation values become effective at two points:
• S_AION[ i ] = TRUE (1 ≤ i ≤ 4)
The value PV_SIM[ i ] is used instead of the value of analog input i of the module.
• S_PVON[ i ] = TRUE (1 ≤ i ≤ 4)
The value PV_SIM[ i ] is used instead of the conditioned value of analog input i of the
module.

7.4 The FORCE355 function block
Simulating Digital Values

Simulation of the values for the digital inputs one to eight is activated via the switches
S_DION[ i ], whereby 1 ≤ i ≤ 8.
The simulation values are specified via the parameters DI_SIM[ i ].
• S_DION[ i ] = TRUE (1 ≤ i ≤ 8)
The value DI_SIM[ i ] is used instead of the value of digital input i of the module.
Note
LEDs I1 to I8 also always display the state of the corresponding digital input during
simulation.
6LPXODWLRQYDOXH ืL ื

39B6,0>L@
6LPXODWLRQ 6LPXODWLRQ
VZLWFKRQ VZLWFKRQ
6B$,21>L@ 6B3921>L@
6HQVRUW\SH
$
'
3UHSUR
)LOWHU 6TXDUHURRW 3RO\OLQH 6WDQGDUGL]H FHVVHG
DQDORJYDOXH
5HIHUHQFH 6LPXODWLRQVZLWFKRQ
LQSXW 6B',21>L@
6LPXODWLRQYDOXH
FRQILJXUHG ',B6,0>L@
'LJLWDOYDOXH
'LJLWDOLQSXW
Figure 7-14 Effect of simulation values
At a restart of the FM 355 after a power-off the simulation switches on the FM 355 are
positioned again to FALSE.
the 2nd and 3rd bytes of the STATUS parameter of the SFB RDREC and WRREC. The
values of RET_VALU are described in the reference manual /2/.
Note
Activation and specification of the simulation values (forcing) is not carried out via the
parameter configuration interface. The corresponding switches and connecting lines are
therefore drawn dashed.

7.5 The READ_355 function block
See also
Instance DB of the FB FORCE355 (Page 11-23)
7.5 7.5 The READ_355 function block
Use
The READ_355 FB is used to read out the digital and analog input values to support
commissioning.
The READ_355 FB does not require an initialization run. It is normally called cyclically.

1. Use STEP 7 to create the instance DB as a data block with an assigned READ_355
function block.
Call
The READ_355 FB has to be called in the same OB as all the other FBs that access the
same FM 355.
Displayed values
The following values are displayed:
• The CJ_TEMP parameter shows the reference junction temperature measured at the
reference junction in degrees C or in degrees F (depending on the temperature unit that
was configured). If no "Thermocouple" sensor type was configured or if the configured
reference junction temperature was selected at all the analog inputs, 0.0 is displayed at
the CJ_TEMP parameter.
• The actual states of digital inputs 1 to 8 are displayed at parameters STAT_DI[1] to
STAT_DI[8], even if these are simulated.
• The values of analog inputs 1 to 4 are displayed at parameters DIAG[1].PV_PER to
DIAG[4].PV_PER in the unit mA or mV respectively. If the simulation of the analog input
value is activated via the FORCE355 FB, the simulated value is displayed.

7.5 The READ_355 function block
• The values of analog inputs 1 to 4 are displayed at parameters DIAG[1].PV_PER to

DIAG[4].PV_PER in the unit mA or mV respectively. If the simulation of the conditioned
physical analog input value is activated via the FORCE355 FB, the simulated value is
displayed.
',$*>L@39B3(5 ืL ื ',$*>L@39B3+<
6HQVRUW\SH
$
' 3UHSUR
FHVVHG
)LOWHU 6TXDUHURRW 3RO\OLQH 6WDQGDUGL]H DQDORJYDOXH
5HIHUHQFH &-B7(03
LQSXW
5HIHUHQFH
FRQILJXUHG
MXQFWLRQ
WHPSHUDWXUH
Figure 7-15 Displayed input value
See also
Instance DB of the READ_355 FB (Page 11-26)

7.6 The CH_DIAG function block
7.6 7.6 The CH_DIAG function block
Use
The CH_DIAG FB reads out further channel-specific parameters from the module (to support
commissioning).
The CH_DIAG FB does not require an initialization run. It is normally called cyclically.

assigned CH_DIAG function block.
CHANNEL parameter at every instance DB
Call
The CH_DIAG FB has to be called in the same OB as all the other FBs that access the same
FM 355.
Displayed values
The following values are displayed:
• The parameter SP_R is only relevant at ratio or blending controllers. It shows the ratio
factor specified via the setpoint value input (refer to the following figure).
• The parameter PV_R is only relevant at a blending controller. It displays the effective
actual value (process value) and is calculated as follows: PV_R = (PV - Offset) / PV_D
(refer to the following figure). Offset is the parameter that can be configured via the
"Multiply" command button.
• DIF_I is the input value of the D-action components of the PID-action controller, not only
at ratio or blending controllers (refer to the following figure).

63B5 &3
0XOWLSO\LQJ
6HWSRLQW HIIHFWLYH
6ZLWFK 5DPS /LPLWLQJ1RUPDOL VHWSRLQW
VDIHW\YDOXH ]LQJ
$FWXDOYDOXH' (UURU
VLJQDO
39B'
$ODUP
3URFHVVYDOXH$ HIIHFWLYH
',)B, SURFHVV
YDOXH
39
'LQSXW
'LVWXUEDQFH
YDULDEOH
Figure 7-16 Displayed diagnostic values of the negative deviation
• LMN_P is the P part of the PID controller (see following figure)

• LMN_I is the I part of the PID controller (see following figure)
• LMN_D is the D part of the PID controller (see following figure)

,'67$786
HIIHFWLYHVHWSRLQW
HIIHFWLYHSURFHVV 7HPSHUDWXUH
YDOXH FRQWUROOHU HIIHFWLYH
PDQLSXODWHG
/01B3 YDULDEOH
/01B,
/01B'
3,'
(UURUVLJQDO
'HDG]RQH
'LQSXW
'LVWXUEDQFHYDULDEOH
Figure 7-17 Displayed values of the control algorithm
H[WHUQDO
PDQLSXODWHG
YDULDEOH
HIIHFWLYH 6ZLWFK
YDULDEOH PDQLSXODWHG 0DQLSXODWHG
YDOXH YDULDEOH
0DQLSXODWHG
6ZLWFK 6ZLWFKLQJ /LPLWLQJ 6SOLWUDQJH YDULDEOH$
FRUUHFWLRQ VDIHW\
PDQLSXODWHG
YDULDEOH
75$&.3(5 0DQLSXODWHG
YDULDEOH%
&RUUHFWLRQLQSXW
Figure 7-18 Displayed values of the continuous-action controller or step controller
See also
Instance DB of the CH_DIAG FB (Page 11-28)

7.7 The PID_PAR function block
7.7 7.7 The PID_PAR function block
Use
The PID_PAR FB is used for online changing of further parameters that cannot be specified
via the PID_FM FB.
The PID_PAR FB does not require an initialization run. To this purpose it has to be called
with the COM_RST = TRUE parameter before it writes data records to the FM 355.
Otherwise calling the FB generates a parameter configuration error on the module. You can
also read out these parameter assignment errors by using the PLC > Parameter Assignment
Error menu of the parameter configuration interface.
In order to save run time the PID_PAR FB should not be called cyclically but only when
parameters are to be changed. COM_RST must then be FALSE.

assigned PID_PAR function block.
CHANNEL parameter at every instance DB
Call
The PID_PAR FB has to be called in the same OB as all the other FBs that access the same
FM 355.

Changing Parameter Values

With the PID_PAR FB you can change one each of the REAL parameters listed in the table
below and one each of the INT parameters during each call.
Note
With PROFIBUS DP operation, with FB 39 from the "FM 355, 455 PID Control" library there
is the restriction that only REAL values with INDEX_R = 30...48 can be transferred
simultaneously with an INTEGER value.
The assignment of the specified value to the parameter is carried out via the index numbers
contained in the table that you specify at the parameter INDEX_R or INDEX_I in the instance
DB of the PID_PAR FB.
If the input COM_RST = TRUE, the FB reads the parameters from the system data are
stores them in static variables. The parameters to be changed are overwritten there and the
complete data record then transferred to the FM. Since the FB thus has its own data
management for the parameters in its static variables, further parameters can also be
changed. To this purpose you have to call up the same instance DB several times
consecutively with COM_RST = FALSE and with different index numbers.
The parameter COM_RST is an input parameter that is not reset by the FB PID_PAR FB.
If the FM 355 is used in distributed I/Os, it may take a few call cycles until the parameters
have been transferred to the FM 355. The parameter BUSY has the value TRUE until the
transfer has been completed. You should therefore repeatedly call the FB PID_PAR when
changing parameters until BUSY = FALSE and RET_VALU = 0.
Note
Please note that parameters that you have changed using the PID_PAR FB are overwritten
by the parameters from the system data during the start-up.

Example
During operation you want to change the ramp-up time for the reference variable as well as
use different analog input values as the actual value depending on the process state.
• Call the PID_PAR FB with COM_RST = TRUE in the start-up of the CPU.
• In order to configure the ramp-up time for the reference variable to 10.0, call the
PID_PAR FB during operation with INDEX_R = 30, VALUE_R = 10.0 and INDEX_I = 0.
• If you want to configure the analog input value 4 of the module as the actual value, during
runtime call the FB PID_PAR with INDEX_R = 0, INDEX_I = 50 and VALUE_I = 4.
Changeable Parameters
Table 7-1 List of the REAL and INT parameters that can be changed with the PID_PAR FB
Data type Description Index number

– No parameter selected 0
REAL Filter time constant for analog input 1
REAL End of measurement (100%) 2
REAL Beginning of measurement (0%) 3
REAL Polygon, Interpolation value 1 input side 4
REAL Polygon, Interpolation value 1 output side 17


REAL Ramp-up time for reference variable 30
REAL Safety reference variable or safety reference variable response 31
REAL Offset for setpoint value linkage (ratio/blending controller) 32
REAL Factor for actual value B (three-component controller) 33
REAL Factor for actual value C (three-component controller) 34
REAL Offset for actual value linkage (three-component controller) 35
REAL Factor for disturbance variable linkage 36
REAL Operating point 37
REAL Aggressivity at fuzzy controller 38
REAL Vertices for split-range function: Start of range input signal A 39
REAL Vertices for split-range function: End of range input signal A 40
REAL Vertices for split-range function: Start of range output signal A 41
REAL Vertices for split-range function: End of range output signal A 42
REAL Vertices for split-range function: Start of range input signal B 43
REAL Vertices for split-range function: End of range input signal B 44
REAL Vertices for split-range function: Start of range output signal B 45
REAL Vertices for split-range function: End of range output signal B 46
REAL Minimum pulse time 47
REAL Minimum break time 48
INT Selection of the reference variable SP or SP_RE for the controller 49
0: Setpoint value SP_RE from function block
1 to 4: Analog input value 1 to 4
17 to 20: Manipulated variable (LMN) of Controller 1 to 4
INT Selection of the main controlled variable actual value A for the controller 50
0: Actual value A = 0.0
INT Selection of the auxiliary controlled variable actual value B for the controller 51
0: Actual value B = 0.0
INT Selection of the auxiliary controlled variable actual value C for the controller 52
0: Actual value C = 0.0
INT Selection of the auxiliary controlled variable actual value D for the controller 53
0: Actual value D = 0.0
17 to 20: Manipulated variable (LMN) of Controller 1 to 4
INT Selection of the disturbance variable DISV for the controller 54
0: Disturbance variable = 0.0
INT Selection of the position tracking TRACK_PER for the controller 55
0: Position adjustment = 0.0


INT Selection of the position tracking LMNR_PER for the controller 56
INT Selection of the signal for changeover to safety value for the manipulated value of the 57
controller
0: Only specification via SAFE_ON parameter of the PID_FM FB
1 to 8: Specification via SAFE_ON parameter of the PID_FM FB ORed with digital input
1 to 8
INT Selection of the signal for changeover to tracking function of the manipulated value of 58
the controller
0: Only specification via LMNTRKON parameter of the PID_FM FB
1 to 8: Specification via LMNTRKON parameter of the PID_FM FB ORed with digital
input 1 to 8
INT Selection of the signal for changeover of the manipulated value of the controller to 59
LMN_RE
0: Only specification via LMN_REON parameter of the PID_FM FB
1 to 8: Specification via LMN_REON parameter of the PID_FM FB ORed with digital
input 1 to 8
INT Selection of the upper endstop signal of the position feedback 60
0: Only specification via LMNRHSRE parameter of the PID_FM FB
1 to 8: Specification via LMNRHSRE parameter of the PID_FM FB ORed with digital
input 1 to 8
INT Selection of the lower endstop signal of the position feedback 61
0: Only specification via LMNRLSRE parameter of the PID_FM FB
1 to 8: Specification via LMNRLSRE parameter of the PID_FM FB ORed with digital
input 1 to 8
Note
The FB 39 PID_PAR from the "FM 355, 455 PID Control" library uses the SFC 54
RD_DPARM. Therefore, you can only use the FB PID_PAR in the CPUs listed in the
following table.

Table 7-2 List of the CPUs, in which the PID_PAR FB can be used
CPU Order No.:

CPU 312IFM 6ES7 312-5AC01-0AB0
CPU 313 6ES7 313-1AD02-0AB0
CPU 314 6ES7 314-1AE03-0AB0
CPU 314IFM 6ES7 314-5AE02-0AB0
CPU 315 6ES7 315-1AF02-0AB0
CPU 315DP 6ES7 315-2AF02-0AB0
CPU 316 6ES7 316-1AG00-0AB0
CPU 614 6ES7 614-1AH02-0AB3
CPU 412-1 6ES7 412-1XF02-0AB0
CPU 412-2 6ES7 412-2XG00-0AB0
CPU 413-1 6ES7 413-1XG02-0AB0
CPU 413-2 6ES7 413-2XG02-0AB0
CPU 414-1 6ES7 414-1XG02-0AB0
CPU 414-2 6ES7 414-2XG02-0AB0
CPU 414-2 6ES7 414-2XJ01-0AB0
CPU 414-3 6ES7 414-3XJ00-0AB0
CPU 414-3H 6ES7 414-3HJ00-0AB0
CPU 416-1 6ES7 416-1XJ02-0AB0
CPU 416-2 6ES7 416-2XK01-0AB0
CPU 416-2 6ES7 416-2XL01-0AB0
CPU 416-3 6ES7 416-3XL00-0AB0
CPU 417-4 6ES7 417-4XL00-0AB0
CPU 417-4H 6ES7 417-4HL00-0AB0
All future CPUs:
Note
If you are using a new S7 300 CPU with Micro Memory Card without PROFINET connection,
instead of:
FB 39 you must use FB 29
. The descriptions of both file types used are available in the Appendix.
With a CPU with PROFINET connection you should use the same block from the FM_PID
"FM 355 PROFINET" library.
See also
Instance DB of the PID_PAR FB (Page 11-31)

7.8 The CJ_T_PAR Function Block
7.8 7.8 The CJ_T_PAR Function Block
Use
The CJ_T_PAR FB is used for online modification of the configured reference junction
temperature. This is necessary if a temperature control system with several FM 355 units
with thermocouple inputs is to be operated without a Pt 100 having to be connected to each
FM 355.
If, for example, the reference junction temperature is measured with an FM 355 at an
extruder control system with more than four heating zones, this can be read out via
READ_355 FB at the CJ_TEMP parameter and configured at the other FM 355 units via the
CJ_T_PAR FB.
The CJ_T_PAR FB requires an initialization run. To this purpose it has to be called once in
the start-up of the CPU using the COM_RST = TRUE parameter.
The CJ_T_PAR FB is normally called cyclically. To this purpose COM_RST should be set to
FALSE for run time reasons.
The COM_RST parameter is an input parameter that is not reset by the CJ_T_PAR FB.

1. Use STEP 7 to create the instance DB as data blocks with an assigned CJ_T_PAR
function block.
CHANNEL parameter at the instance DB
The reference junction temperature can be specified at the CJ_T parameter.
The output parameter RET_VALU includes the return value RET_VAL of the SFCs 58 and
59. The values of the RET_VALU are described in the /2/ reference manual.
If the FM 355 is used in distributed I/Os, it may take a few call cycles until the parameter has
been transferred to the FM 355. The parameter BUSY has the value TRUE until the transfer
has been completed. You should therefore repeatedly call the CJ_T_PAR FB when changing
parameters until BUSY = FALSE.

7.8 The CJ_T_PAR Function Block
Call
The FB CJ_T-PAR must be called in the same OB as all the other FBs that access the same
FM 355.
Note
The FB 40 CJ_T_PAR from the "FM 355,455 PID Control" library uses the SFC 54
RD_DPARM. You can therefore only use the CJ_T_PAR FB in the CPUs listed in the
previous table:
Note
If you are using a new S7-300 CPU with Micro Memory Card, then insetad of
and instead of FB 40 you must use FB 30
. The descriptions of both file types used are available in the Appendix.
With a CPU with PROFINET connection you should use the same block from the FM_PID
"FM 355 PROFINET" library
See also
Instance DB of the CJ_T_PAR FB (Page 11-33)

PROFINET Operation
7.9 PROFINET Operation
General
For the PROFINET operation you have to use the blocks from the FM_PID libraries under
"FM 355 PROFINET". Their functionalities correspond to the blocks under "FM 355/455 PID
Control" and are described in the same way in chapter 7 and 11. The blocks for PROFINET
operation use the SFBs 52/53/81 for data transfer on the FM 355.
SFCs for data transfer without PROFINET SFBs for data transfer with PROFINET operation
operation
SFC 58 "WR_REC” SFB 53 "WRREC”
SFC 59 "RD_REC” SFB 52 "RDREC”
SFC 54 "RD_DPARM” SFB 81 "RD_DPAR”
SFC 102 "RD_DPARA” SFB 81 "RD_DPAR”
In the blocks from "FM 355 PROFINET", the output parameter RET_VALU is formed from
the 2nd and 3rd byte of the STATUS parameter of the SFBs.

PROFINET Operation
Switching to PROFINET operation

The blocks are not interface compatible. When replacing proceed as follows:
Tool Function Comment

LAD/STL/FDB File-> Source generation... To not lose the parameter assignment again,
generate the STL sources of the instance DBs.
SIMATIC Manager Copying Copy the required blocks from the "FM_PID-
>FM355 PROFINET" library into the user
program. The existing blocks can be
overwritten.
LAD/STL/FDB File-> Compile Compile STL sources created above.
The following table shows the blocks with their SFCs/SFBs for the data transfer and the
corresponding blocks for PROFINET operation.
"FM 355/455 PID Control" blocks for the "FM 355 PROFINET" blocks for the PROFINET
Centralized configuration and operation
PROFIBUS operation
FB31 "PID_FM" FB31 "PID_FM"
SFC58 WR_REC; SFC59 RD_REC SFB52 RDREC; SFB53 WRREC
FB32 "FUZ_355" FB32 "FUZ_355"
SFC58 WR_REC; SFC59 RD_REC SFB52 RDREC; SFB53 WRREC
FB34 "FORCE355" FB34 "FORCE355"
SFC58 WR_REC SFB53 WRREC
FB 36 "READ_355" FB36 "READ_355"
SFC59 RD_REC SFB52 RDREC
FB39 "PID_PAR" FB39 "PID_PAR"
SFC58 WR_REC; SFC54 RD_DPARM SFB53 WRREC; SFC81 RD_DPAR
FB 40 "CJ_T_PAR" FB40 "CJ_T_PAR"
SFC58 WR_REC; SFC54 RD_DPARM SFB53 WRREC; SFC81 RD_DPAR
CPUs with Micro Memory Card: Use the FB39. Note however the different
FB29 "PID_PAR using SFC102" functions between FB39 und FB29.
SFC58 WR_REC; SFC102 RD_DPARA
CPUs with Micro Memory Card: Use the FB40. Note however the different
FB30 "CJ_T_PAR using SFC102" functions between FB40 and FB30.
SFC58 WR_REC; SFC102 RD_DPARA

Commissioning the FM 355 8
Introduction
In this chapter we show you in a few steps how to commission the FM 355.
HW Installation and Wiring

In order to obtain a better overview the commissioning process is divided into several small
steps. In this first section you install the FM 355 into your S7-300 and wire the external I/O
elements.
Step What to do ✓
1 Determining the slot
Slot 4 to 11 in Rack 0 ❐
2 Installing the FM 355
• Switch the CPU to STOP mode. ❐
• Remove the neighboring module and plug in the bus connector. ❐
• Hook in the FM 355 onto the rail and screw it tight. ❐
• Clip on the slot number. ❐
• Install the shield contact element ❐
3 Wiring the FM 355
• Analog inputs (left-hand front connector) ❐
• Digital inputs (right-hand front connector) ❐
• Analog outputs (only continuous-action controllers, right-hand front connector) ❐
• Digital outputs (only step controllers, right-hand front connector) ❐
• Wiring the supply voltage ❐
24 V supply voltage L+: right-hand front connector Pin 1 ❐
Mass of supply voltage M: right-hand front connector Pin 20 ❐
• Wiring the reference potential of the analog measuring circuit
MANA left-hand front connector Pin 20
4 Front connectors
The front connectors have to be latched in. ❐
5 Shield
Check the shield of the individual cables. ❐
6 Switching the power supply on
Switch on the 24 V supply for the FM 355. ❐

Setting Up a New Project

If you want to insert the FM 355 into an existing project, go to the next section.
If you do not have a project yet, create a new project under STEP 7 so that configuration
with the parameter configuration mask is possible:
Step What to do ✓
1 Create a new project under STEP 7. ❐
2 Create a new rack. ❐
3 Enter your hardware structure in the rack in HW Config. ❐
4 Select the FM 355 from the module catalog and drag it to the selected slot. ❐
5 Write down the module address that is now displayed.
This value is required for when preparing the instance DB. ____
6 Now call the parameter configuration masks for the FM 355 by double-clicking the ❐
FM 355 order number.
Now go to the Parameter Configuration section.
Inserting an FM 355 into an Existing Project

If you want to insert an FM 355 into a SIMATIC 300 station of an existing project, proceed as
follows:
Step What to do ✓
1 Open the SIMATIC 300 station of your existing project. ❐
2 Select the FM 355 from the module catalog and drag it to the selected slot. ❐
3 Write down the module address that is now displayed.
This value is required for when preparing the instance DB. ____
4 Now call the parameter configuration masks for the FM 355 by double-clicking the ❐
FM 355 order number.
Parameter Configuration
Configure the module.
Step What to do ✓
1 Fill out the masks of the basic configuration:
• In the interrupt selection specify whether the FM 355 is to trigger interrupts. ❐
2 Click the Parameters... button. ❐
3 Fill out the dialog boxes. ❐
4 Save the parameter configuration using the File > Save menu item. ❐

Saving Parameter Configuration Data and Transferring Them to the FM 355

After you have completed the parameter configuration, you have to save the data and
prepare the system for operation.
Step What to do ✓
1 Terminate the parameter configuration interface. ❐
2 Save the project via the File > Save and compile menu. ❐
3 Switch the CPU to the STOP mode. ❐
4 Transfer the data to the CPU via the Download to PLC ... menu. ❐
The data are transferred directly to the CPU and to the FM 355.
Creating an Instance DB
An instance DB has to be created for each controller channel so that you can use the
functions of the module.
Step What to do ✓
1 Create the instance DBs for the controller channels as data blocks with an ❐
assigned FB 31 PID_FM function block.
2 Enter the module address in the MOD_ADDR parameter at every instance DB. ❐
You wrote down the address while configuring the hardware with STEP 7.
3 Enter the channel number for every instance DB in the CHANNEL parameters. ❐

You can now optimize and test your controlled system.
Step What to do ✓
1 Switch the CPU to the RUN mode. ❐
2 Open the parameter configuration interface and measure the motor actuating ❐
time:
Test > Measure motor actuating time (only at step controllers)
3 Call up the controller optimization: ❐
Test > Controller optimization
4 Carry out the controller optimization steps. ❐
5 Monitoring and controlling the control loop using the loop monitor: ❐
Test > Loop monitor
6 Monitor the control loop using the curve recorder: ❐
Test > Curve recorder

Saving the Project

When you have carried out all the tests successfully and the FM 355 configuration is
optimized, you have to save the data again.
Step What to do ✓
1 Save all the data in the parameter configuration interface by using File > Save. ❐
2 Terminate the parameter configuration interface. ❐
3 Save the project via the File > Save menu. ❐
4 Transfer the data to the CPU in the STOP mode via the Download to PLC ... ❐
menu.
5 Switch the CPU to the RUN mode. ❐
See also
Installing and Removing the FM 355 (Page 4-3)
Wiring front connectors (Page 5-8)

Properties of Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs 9
9.1 9.1 Properties of the Digital Inputs and Outputs (Step Controllers)
Properties
The digital inputs and outputs of the FM 355 S have the following properties:
• 8 inputs
• 8 outputs
• Output current 0.1 A
• Rated load voltage: 24 V DC
• Suitable for switches, 2- /3-/4-wire proximity switches (BEROs), solenoid valves, DC
contactors and indicator lights
Special Feature
When you supply the 24 V DC supply voltage by means of a mechanical contact, the FM
outputs carry the "1" signal for approximately 50 µs, depending on the circuit. You need to
take this into account if you connect the FM to fast counters.

Properties of Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs
9.1 Properties of the Digital Inputs and Outputs (Step Controllers)
Wiring and Block Diagrams

The following figure shows the wiring diagram and the block diagram of the digital inputs and
outputs of the FM 355 S.
,QSXWV /
/

%DFNSODQH
EXV

0 ,QWHUQDO

0
2XWSXWV /
%DFNSODQH
EXV
0 ,QWHUQDO
0 0
7HUPLQDOGLDJUDP %ORFNGLDJUDP
&KDQQHOQXPEHU
6WDWXV/('JUHHQ
Figure 9-1 Wiring diagram and block diagram of the digital inputs and outputs (step controllers)
The LEDs of the digital outputs are not controlled and do not have any meaning.
See also
Basic Structure of the FM 355 (Page 3-1)

9.2 Properties of the Analog Inputs
9.2 9.2 Properties of the Analog Inputs
Properties
The analog inputs of the FM 355 have the following properties:
• 4 inputs
• Measured value resolution
– 12 bits
– 14 bits
• Measuring method selectable per analog input:
– Voltage
– Current
– Resistance
– Temperature
• Measuring range selection per analog input
• Programmable diagnostics
• Programmable diagnostic interrupt
• Limit monitoring
• Programmable interrupt when limit is exceeded
Current Measurement
At current measurement an external measuring resistor of 50 Ω has to be connected to the
analog inputs between M+ and M– .
Reference Input COMP+, COMP-

If you connect a Pt 100 to the analog inputs COMP+ and COMP- to measure the reference
junction temperature, you have to supply current to this Pt 100 from the CH3 input
(connections IC3+ and IC3–). It is then not possible to connect a Pt 100 to the CH3 input.
However, input CH3 can still be used for current or voltage measurement or to connect a
thermocouple (refer to the next figure).
Resolution
The integration time results from the selected resolution of the measured value. The higher
the resolution precision of the measured value, the longer is the integration time for an
analog input channel.

Connection diagram
The following figure shows the connection diagram of the analog inputs of the FM 355.
9ROWDJHPHDVXUHPHQW 5HVLVWDQFH
)DXOW/('VUHG PHDVXUH
7KHUPRFRXSOHHOHPHQWV
PHQW
&XUUHQWPHDVXUHPHQW
)0bb6
3,'&RQWURO
6)
,F ,&
,&ದ
,Fದ
0 0 &+
9
&+
0ದ 0ದ
ದ
,F ,&
,&ದ
,Fದ &+
0 0
&+
9 0ದ 0ದ
ದ
&203 &203
&203ದ &203ದ
,F
,&
,&ದ
,Fದ
0 0 &+
9
&+
0ದ 0ದ
ದ
,F ,&
,&ದ
,Fದ &+
0 0
&+
9 0ದ 0ದ
ದ
0$1$ 0 $1$ 0 $1$
9+$(
ZLWKFRPSHQVDWLRQRIWKHUHIHUHQFH
7HUPLQDOGLDJUDP
MXQFWLRQWHPSHUDWXUHZLWK3W
Figure 9-2 Connection diagram of the analog inputs

Block Diagram
The following figure shows the block diagram of the analog inputs. The input impedance is
determined by the set measuring range.
&KDQQHODFWLYDWLRQ
3RZHUVRXUFH
&+
&+
ವವ $'&
ವ 3URFHVVLQJLQ
WKH)0
H[WHUQDO
FRPSHQVD
WLRQ
ವವ
ವ &RQILJXUHG
&+ FRPSHQVDWLRQ
&+
/
9'& LQWHUQDO
SRZHUVXSSO\
0
Figure 9-3 Block diagram of the analog inputs
See also

9.3 Properties of the Analog Outputs (Continuous-Action Controllers)
9.3 9.3 Properties of the Analog Outputs (Continuous-Action Controllers)
Properties
The analog outputs of the FM 355 C have the following properties:
• 4 outputs
• The output channels can be programmed as
– Voltage output
– Current output
• Resolution 12 bits
• Programmable diagnostics
Note
When you switch the supply voltage (L+) off and on, the output may carry incorrect
interim values for the duration of approx. 10 ms.

Connection diagram
The following figure shows the connection diagram of the analog outputs of the FM 355 C.
&XUUHQWRXWSXW 9ROWDJHRXWSXW
/ /
9 9
/ , ,

, ,

, ,

, ,

, ,

, ,

, ,

, ,

&+ 4, 49

0 $1$ &+ 0 $1$ &+
&+ 4, 49
0 $1$ &+ 0 $1$ &+
&+ 4, 49
0 $1$ &+ 0 $1$ &+
&+ 4, 49
0 $1$ &+ 0 $1$ &+
0 0
0 0
0
7HUPLQDOGLDJUDP
Figure 9-4 Connection diagram of the analog outputs (continuous-action controllers)

Block Diagram
The following figure shows the block diagram of the analog outputs of the FM 355 C.
'$&
4
&+
0 $1$
4
3URFHVVLQJLQ &+
0 $1$
WKH)0
4
&+
0 $1$
4
&+
0 $1$
/
LQWHUQDO 9'&
SRZHU 0
VXSSO\
%ORFNGLDJUDP
0 $1$ $OOFKDQQHOVDUHFRQQHFWHGLQWHUQDOO\
Figure 9-5 Block diagram of the analog outputs (continuous-action controllers)
See also

10
Connecting Measuring Transducers
and Loads/Actuators
10.1 10.1 Connecting Measuring Transducers to Analog Inputs
Introduction
Depending on the measuring type used you can connect various measuring transducers to
the analog inputs of the FM 355:
• Voltage sensor
• Current sensor as 4-wire measuring transducer and 2-wire measuring transducer
• Resistance
In this section you will find out how to connect the measuring transducers and what to watch
for when doing so.
Lines for Analog Signals

You should use shielded and twisted-pair lines for the analog signals. This reduces the effect
of interference. You should ground the shield of the analog lines at both ends of the line. Any
potential difference between the cable ends may cause an equipotential current on the
shield, and thus disturbance on analog signals. If this is the case, you should only ground the
shield at one end of the line.
Reference Point MANA

When operating the FM 355 always interconnect the reference point MANA of the measuring
circuit with terminal M of the CPU. Wire the MANA terminal to the M terminal of the CPU. Any
potential difference between MANA and the M terminal of the CPU could otherwise corrupt the
analog signal.

Connecting Measuring Transducers and Loads/Actuators
10.1 Connecting Measuring Transducers to Analog Inputs
Abbreviations Used
The abbreviations used in the figures below have the following meaning:
M+: Measuring line (positive)

M– Measuring line (negative)
MANA Reference potential of the analog measuring circuit
M Ground terminal
L+ Power supply 24 V DC
UCM Potential difference between inputs and the reference potential of measuring
circuit MANA
Connecting measuring sensors to analog inputs

No potential difference ≥|UCM| (common mode voltage) may occur between the measuring
lines M- of the input channels and the reference point of measuring circuit MANA. In order for
the permitted value not to be exceeded, you have to carry out different measures depending
on the potential connection of the sensor (insulated, non-insulated). The steps you have to
take are described in this chapter.
Isolated Measuring Transducers

The isolated measuring transducers are not connected to the local ground potential. They
can be operated in electrically isolated mode. Depending on local conditions or interference,
potential differences UCM (static or dynamic) can occur between the measuring lines M- of
the input channels and the reference point of the measuring circuit MANA.
Note
In order to ensure that the permissible value (UCM) is not exceeded you must connect M- to
MANA.
You must also establish a connection from M- to MANA when resistance-type sensors are
connected. This also applies to inputs which are programmed accordingly, but remain
unused.

The following figure shows the connection in principle of insulated measuring transducers to
an FM 355.
/ )0
0
0
,QVXODWHG 0ದ
WUDQVGXF 0 $'& /RJLF
HUV
0ದ
0 $1$
&38
0
/
0
*URXQGEXV
Figure 10-1 Block diagram for the connection of electrically isolated measuring transducers
Non-Isolated Measuring Transducers

The non-isolated measuring transducers are connected to the local ground potential. You
must connect MANA to the ground potential. Local conditions or disturbance may cause
potential differences CMV (static or dynamic) between locally distributed measuring points.
If the permissible value for UCM is exceeded, interconnect the measuring points by means of
equipotential conductors.
The CPU must be operated ground-coupled. This means that you must provide a jumper
between and M at the CPU.

The following figure shows the connection in principle of non-isolated measuring transducers
to an FM 355.
/ )0
0
0
QRQ 0ದ
LQVXODWHG 0 $'& /RJLF
WUDQVGXF
0ದ
HUV
8 &0 0 $1$
&38
0
&DSDFLW\FRPSHQ /
0
VDWLQJFDEOH
*URXQGEXV
Figure 10-2 Block diagram of the connection of non-insulated measuring transducers

10.2 Use of Thermocouples
10.2 10.2 Use of Thermocouples
Introduction
This section describes the design of thermocouples and the points to be observed when
connecting thermocouples.
Thermocouple Structure
A thermocouple comprises
• The thermocouple (detecting elements) and
• The mounting and connection parts required in each case.
The thermocouple consists of two wires made of different metals, or of metal alloys soldered
or welded together at their ends. The different thermocouple types, for example, B, J or K,
are derived from diverse material compositions. The measuring principle of all
thermocouples is the same, irrespective of their type.

°C
Figure 10-3 Thermocouple structure
① Measuring point
② Thermocouple with plus and minus thermo-shanks
③ Connection point
④ Equalizing lead
⑤ Reference junction
⑥ Supply line
⑦ Trimming resistor
⑧ Measuring point of the thermoelectric voltage

Operating Principle of Thermocouples

Any temperature difference between the measuring point and the free ends of the
thermocouple induces a thermoelectric voltage which is tapped at the terminating ends.
The thermoelectric voltage induced on the thermocouple is a function of the temperature
difference between the measuring point and the free ends, and is also determined by the
material factor. Thermocouples always sense a temperature difference. It is therefore
essential to hold the free ends at the known temperature of a reference junction, in order to
be able to determine the temperature at the measuring junction.
If this is not possible, the reference junction temperature has to be detected and equalized
via the additional input with a Pt 100.
Extension to a Reference Junction

The thermocouples can be extended from their connecting point by means of equalizing
lines to a point with a temperature which remains constant as far as possible (reference
junction).
These compensating wires are made of the same materials as the thermocouple wires. The
incoming lines are made of copper. Ensure that the polarity of the equalizing lines is not
reversed since large measuring errors will otherwise arise.
Compensation of the Reference Junction Temperature

The influence of temperature fluctuations at the reference junction can be compensated by
measuring the reference junction temperature outside the module.
Measuring of the reference junction temperature

The influence of the temperature on the reference junction of a thermocouple (for example
the terminal box) can be equalized by measuring the reference junction temperature with a
Pt 100.
If the actual reference temperature differs from the comparison temperature, the
temperature-dependent resistance changes. A positive or negative compensation voltage
occurs that is added to the thermo-electromotive force.
Please note:
• The power supply of Channel 3 must be used to supply the constant current for the
Pt 100.
• Channel 3 can then not be used for Pt 100 measurement.

Use of Thermocouples
The following points must be observed when connecting thermocouples:
Depending on where the reference junction is required, either configured or external
compensation can be used.
In case of configured compensation a configurable reference junction temperature of the
module is used for comparison.
In the case of external compensation the temperature of the reference junction of the
thermocouples is taken into consideration by means of a Pt 100.
This Pt 100 is connected to Connections 10 and 11 at the left-hand front connector of the
module, whereby the Pt 100 must be applied to the reference junction of the thermocouples.
Its power supply must be taken from Channel 3 (Connections 12 and 13 of the left-hand front
connector).
The following restrictions apply:
• External compensation with connection of the Pt 100 to Connections 10 and 11 of the
module can only be carried out at one thermocouple type. This means that all channels
operating with external compensation must use the same type.
Abbreviations Used

COMP+: Compensating terminal (positive)
COMP– Compensating terminal (negative)
M Ground terminal
Connection Alternatives for Thermocouples

The following figures show the various possibilities of connecting thermocouples to external
and configured compensation.
In addition to the information below the information contained in the section "Connecting
Measuring Transducers to Analog Inputs" applies.
In the figures below the required connecting lines between the M-connection of the CPU, M-,
MANA and the potential to ground which result from the potential connection of the FM 355 to
the sensor (insulated, non-insulated) are not shown. This means that you must continue to
observe and implement the information given in the section "Connecting Measuring
Transducers to Analog Inputs".

Thermocouples with External Compensation of the Reference Junction

If all the thermocouples which are connected to the inputs of the FM 355 have the same
reference junction, carry out compensation as shown in the following figure. The
thermocouples which use a reference junction must be of the same type.
6XSSO\FRQGXFWRU / )0
FRSSHU
0
0
0ದ
7KHUPR 3URFHVV
FRXSOH 0 /RJLF LQJLQWKH
HOHPHQWV 0ದ )0
&RPSHQVDW
LQJFDEOH $'&
,&
VDPH
PDWHULDODV &203
IRUWKHUPR
FRXSOH
HOHPHQWV
&203ದ
,&ದ
5HIHUHQFHMXQFWLRQ
Figure 10-4 Block diagram for connecting thermocouples with external compensation
Grounding of thermocouples is shown in the figures in the section "Connecting Measuring


Thermocouples with Configured Compensation of the Reference Junction

The configured temperature compensation can be used when thermocouples are connected
directly or via equalizing lines to the inputs of the module.
6XSSO\ / )0
FRQGXFWRU 0
FRSSHU
0
0ದ
7KHUPR 3URFHVV
FRXSOH 0 /RJLF LQJLQWKH
HOHPHQWV 0ದ )0
&RPSHQVDW
$'&
LQJFDEOH ,&
VDPH
&203
PDWHULDODV
IRUWKHUPR
FRXSOH
HOHPHQWV
&203ದ
,&ದ
0 $1$
5HIHUHQFHMXQFWLRQ
&RPSHQVDWLRQVSHFLILHGE\WKHSDUDPHWHUDVVLJQPHQW
LQWHUIDFH
Figure 10-5 Block diagram for connecting thermocouples with configured compensation
Grounding of thermocouples is shown in the figures in the section "Connecting Measuring


10.3 Connecting Voltage Sensors, Current Sensors and Resistance Thermometers
10.3 Connecting Voltage Sensors, Current Sensors and Resistance

10.3
Thermometers
Introduction
The following figures show how to connect voltage sensors, current sensors and resistance
thermometers.
Abbreviations Used
IC+ Constantcurrent line (positive)

IC– Constantcurrent line (negative)
MANA Reference potential of the analog measuring circuit
M Ground terminal
In addition to the information below the information contained in the section "Connecting
Measuring Transducers to Analog Inputs" applies.
In the figures below the required connecting lines between the M-connection of the CPU, M-,
MANA and the potential to ground which result from the potential connection of the FM 355 to
the sensor (insulated, non-insulated) are not shown. This means that you must continue to
observe and implement the information given in the section "Connecting Measuring
Connection of Voltage Sensors

The following figure shows the connection of voltage sensors to an FM 355.
/ )0
0
0
8 0ದ
ದ
0 $'& /RJLF 3URFHVVLQJLQ
8 0ದ WKH)0
ದ
0 $1$
Figure 10-6 Connection of voltage sensors

Connection of Current Sensors As Four-Wire Measuring Transducers

Four-wire measuring transducers have a separate power supply.
The following figure shows the connection of current sensors as 4-wire measuring
transducers to an FM 355.
/ )0
0
6HQVRUHJ
SUHVVXUHJDXJH
0
ZLUHPHDVXU
LQJWUDQVGXFHU


WKH)0
0ದ
ದ
0 $1$
/ 0
H[WHUQDOUHVLVWDQFH വ
0
Figure 10-7 Connecting 4-wire measuring transducers
Connection of Current Sensors As Two-Wire Measuring Transducers

The 2-wire measuring transducer converts the fed measured variable into a current.
You have to wire the supply voltage short-circuit-proof to the 2-wire measuring transducer.
Provide for a fuse as shown in the following figure.
2-wire measuring transducers must be electrically isolated.
The following figure shows the connection of current sensors as 2-wire measuring
transducers.
/ )0
6HQVRUHJ 0
SUHVVXUHJDXJH
%DFNXS
0
ZLUHPHDVXU
LQJWUDQVGXFHU

WKH)0
0ದ
ದ
0 $1$
0 H[WHUQDOUHVLVWDQFH വ
Figure 10-8 Connecting 2-wire measuring transducers

Connection of Resistance Thermometers (For Example, Pt 100) and Resistors

The resistance thermometers/resistors are measured in a four-wire connection. Constant
current is fed to the resistance thermometers/resistors by means of the connections IC+ and
IC-. The voltage arising at the resistance thermometer/resistor is measured at the connection
M + and M -. This ensures highly accurate measurement results with the four-conductor
connection.
The following figure shows the connection of resistance thermometers to an FM 355.
/ )0
0
0
0ದ
$'& 3URFHVVLQJLQ
,& /RJLF
WKH)0
,& ,&ದ
0 $1$
Figure 10-9 Connecting resistance thermometers
With the two/three-conductor connection, you must apply corresponding jumpers to the
module between M+ and IC+ or M- and IC-. However, you have to expect a loss of accuracy in
the measurement results.

10.4 Connecting Loads/Actuators to Analog Outputs
10.4 10.4 Connecting Loads/Actuators to Analog Outputs
Introduction
With the FM 355 C you can supply the loads / actuators with current or voltage. The figure
below illustrates the principle.
Lines for Analog Signals

You should use shielded and twisted-pair lines for the analog signals. This reduces the effect
of interference. You should ground the shield of the analog lines at both ends of the line. If
there are differences in potential between the ends of the cables, equipotential current may
flow across the shield, which could disturb the analog signals. If this is the case, you should
only ground the shield at one end of the line.
Reference Point MANA

When operating the module always interconnect the reference point MANA of the measuring
circuit with terminal M of the CPU. Connect the MANA terminal to the M terminal of the CPU.
A difference in potential between MANA and the M connection of the CPU might give rise to a
corruption of the analog signal.
Abbreviations Used
The abbreviations used in the figure below have the following meaning:
Q Analog output (current or voltage, depending on the configuration)

MANA Reference potential of the analog circuit
RL: Load/Actuator
M Ground terminal

10.4 Connecting Loads/Actuators to Analog Outputs
Connecting Loads to an Analog Output

Loads at an analog output have to be connected to Q and the reference point of the analog
circuit MANA.
Loads can only be connected to an analog output with a 2-wire connection.
The following figure shows the principle connection of loads to an analog output of an
FM 355 C.
)0 /
0
3URFHVVLQJLQ /RJLF '$&

WKH)0
5/
0 $1$
&38
0
/
0
*URXQGEXV
Figure 10-10 Connecting a load to an FM 355 C

10.5 Connecting Loads/Actuators to Digital Outputs
10.5 10.5 Connecting Loads/Actuators to Digital Outputs
Introduction
Voltage can be supplied to loads/actuators by means of the FM 355 S. The following figure
illustrates the principle:
Abbreviations Used
The abbreviations used in the figure below have the following meaning:
Q Digital output
RL: Load/Actuator
M Ground terminal
Connecting Loads/Actuators to a Digital Output

The following figure shows the connection in principle of loads/actuators to a digital output of
an FM 355 S.
)0 /
4
3URFHVVLQJLQ
/RJLF
WKH)0
5/
Figure 10-11 Connection of loads/actuators to an FM 355 S

10.5 Connecting Loads/Actuators to Digital Outputs

Assignment of the Instance DBs 11
11.1 11.1 Instance DB of the PID_FM FB
Introduction
If you want to communicate with the FM 355 from the user program, you require the PID_FM
FB. In addition you have to create an instance DB, that is assigned to the FB, for each used
controller channel.
Note
All the in/out parameters are set to FALSE after an instance DB has been created.
In order to transfer the parameters from the FM 355 to the instance DB you have to carry out
an initialization run at which the in/out parameter COM_RST = TRUE.
The following tables list the parameters of this instance DB:

• Input parameters
• Output parameters
• In/out parameters

Assignment of the Instance DBs
11.1 Instance DB of the PID_FM FB
Input Parameters
Table 11-1 Input parameters of the instance DB for the PID_FM FB
Add. Parameter Data Comment Permitted range of Default Explanation In the

Type English values setting parameter
assignme
nt screen
form
0.0 MOD_ADD INT FM 355/455 256 The module address -
R module address that resulted from the
configuration with
STEP 7 is given at this
input.
2.0 CHANNEL INT Channel Number 1 to 4 1 The number of the -
controller channel to
which the instance DB
refers is configured at
the "Channel number"
input.
4.0 PHASE INT Phase of PID self Is not configured 0 The PHASE parameter -
tuner can be interconnected
with the PHASE output
parameter of a PID
self-tuner (program for
self-tuning of controller
parameters). The
phase state of the PID
self tuner can then be
displayed in clear text
in the loop monitor.
This parameter is not
relevant for the OP.

Output Parameters
Table 11-2 Output parameters of the instance DB for the PID_FM FB
Addr. Parameter Data Comment Permitted range of Default Explanation In the

type English values setting parameter
assign-
ment
screen
form
6.0 RET_VALU INT Return value 0 RET_VALU includes -
SFC 58/59 the return value
SFB 52/53 RET_VAL of the
SFC 58/59. With the
block for PROFINET
Mode, the RET_VAL
includes the 2nd and
3rd bytes from the
STATUS parameter of
the SFB 52/53.
RET_VALU can be
evaluated if an error is
reported via the
QMOD_F (see
reference manual /2/).
8.0 out_par WORD Begin of output W#16#3130 W#16# The out_par parameter -
parameters 3130 may not be overwritten
by the user. It marks
the start of the output
parameter that is read
by the module if
READ_VAR = TRUE is
set.
10.0 SP REAL Setpoint Technical range of 0.0 The setpoint value that -
values is currently in effect is
(physical variable) available at the
"Setpoint" output.
14.0 PV REAL Process variable Technical range of 0.0 The effective process -
values variable is output at the
(physical variable) "process variable"
output.
18.0 ER REAL Error signal Technical range of 0.0 The effective negative -
values deviation is output at
(physical variable) the "Negative deviation"
output.
22.0 DISV REAL Disturbance -100.0...100.0 (%) 0.0 The effective -
variable disturbance variable is
output at the
"Disturbance variable"
output.


assign-
ment
screen
form
26.0 LMN REAL Manipulated -100.0...100.0 (%) 0.0 The effective -
value manipulated value is
output at the
"Manipulated value"
output. At a step
controller without
analog position
feedback the unlimited
P- + D-action
component is output at
the LMN parameter.
30.0 LMN_A REAL Manipulated -100.0...100.0 (%) 0.0 On the output -
value A of split "Manipulated value A of
range the split range function /
function/repeate position feedback" in
d manipulated the case of continuous
value controllers the
manipulated value A of
the split range function,
and with step
controllers with analog
position feedback, the
position feedback is
displayed.
The LMN_A output can
only be used for an
approximate display of
a respective simulated
manipulated variable. In
doing so, the start value
LMNRSVAL of the
simulated position
feedback has to be
configured accordingly
and becomes effective
when LMNRS_ON is
set.
34.0 LMN_B REAL Manipulated -100.0...100.0 (%) 0.0 Manipulated value B of -
value B of split the split-range function
range function is displayed at the
output "Manipulated
value B of the split-
range function§ at a
continuous-action
controller.


assign-
ment
screen
form
38.0 QH_ALM BOOL High limit alarm FALSE The actual value or the -
reached controlled variable is
monitored for four
limits. Exceeding of the
limit H_ALM is signaled
at the "Upper limit
alarm triggered" output.
38.1 QH_WRN BOOL High limit FALSE The actual value or the -
warning reached controlled variable is
monitored for four
limit H_WRN is
signaled at the "Upper
limit warning triggered"
output.
38.2 QL_WRN BOOL Lower limit FALSE The actual value or the -
warning reached controlled variable is
monitored for four
limit L_WRN is signaled
at the "Lower limit
warning triggered"
output.
38.3 QL_ALM BOOL Low limit alarm FALSE The actual value or the -
monitored for four
limit L_ALM is signaled
at the "Lower limit
38.4 QLMN_HLM BOOL High limit of FALSE The manipulated -
manipulated variable is always
value reached limited to an high and a
low limit. The "high limit
of manipulated value
reached" output
displays the exceeding
of the upper limit.
(this does not apply to
step-action controllers
without analog position
feedback).


assign-
ment
screen
form
38.5 QLMN_LLM BOOL Low limit of FALSE The manipulated -
manipulated variable is always
value reached limited to an high and a
low limit. The "low limit
reached" output
displays the falling
short of the low limit.
feedback).
38.6 QPARA_F BOOL Parameter FALSE The module checks the -
assignment validity of the
error parameters. A
parameter configuration
error is displayed at the
"Parameter
configuration error"
output. You can also
read out these
parameter assignment
errors by using the PLC
> Parameter
Assignment Error
menu of the parameter
38.7 QCH_F BOOL Channel error FALSE The output "Channel -
error" is set if the
controller channel
cannot supply any valid
results. "Channel error"
(e.g. wire break) is also
set if QPARA_F = 1 or
QMOD_F = 1. If
QCH_F = TRUE, then
the precise error
information in the
diagnostic record DS1
of the module is read
off.
39.0 QUPRLM BOOL Limit of positive FALSE The setpoint is limited -
setpoint in positive and negative
inclination inclination. If the output
reached "Limit of positive
setpoint inclination
triggered" is set, the
positive setpoint
inclination is limited.


assign-
ment
screen
form
39.1 QDNRLM BOOL Limit of negative FALSE The setpoint is limited -
setpoint in positive and negative
inclination inclination. If the
reached "negative set value
inclination reached"
output is set, then the
set value inclination is
restricted.
39.2 QSP_HLM BOOL High limit of FALSE The setpoint is always -
setpoint reached limited by an upper and
lower limit. The output
"Upper limit of setpoint
value triggered"
indicates that the upper
limit has been
exceeded.
39.3 QSP_LLM BOOL Low limit of FALSE The setpoint is always -
setpoint reached limited to a high and a
of set value reached"
output displays the
falling short of the low
limit.
39.4 QLMNUP BOOL Manipulated FALSE This is the output -
signal up "Manipulated value
signal up".
(For step controllers or
pulse controllers only)
39.5 QLMNDN BOOL Manipulated FALSE This is the output -
signal down "Manipulated value
signal down".
39.6 QID BOOL Identification in FALSE QID = TRUE shows -
work that an identification is
running (not that it is
switched on). After the
end of identification the
identification result can
be read out via the
IDSTATUS parameter
of the CH_DIAG FB.


assign-
ment
screen
form
40.0 QSPOPON BOOL Setpoint FALSE The output "set value -
operation on operation on" shows if
the set value is being
operated by the
configuration tool. If the
bit is set, the value
SP_OP is used as the
setpoint value.
40.1 QLMNSAFE BOOL Safety operation FALSE If the output "Safety -
mode" is set, the safety
manipulated value is
output as the
manipulated value.
40.2 QLMNOPON BOOL Manipulated FALSE The output -
value operation "manipulated value
on operation on" shows if
the set value is being
operated by the
configuration tool. If the
bit is set, the value
LMN_OP is used as the
manipulated value.
40.3 QLMNTRK BOOL Follow-up FALSE The output "Follow-up -
operation mode" indicates
whether the
tracked via an analog
input.
40.4 QLMN_RE BOOL Manual = 1 FALSE The output "manual = -
Automatic = 0 1; automatic = 0"
indicates whether or not
the manipulated value
is set on the external
manipulated value
LMN_RE (manual = 1).
40.5 QLMNR_HS BOOL High limit signal FALSE The output "Upper end -
of repeated stop signal of position
manipulated feedback" indicates
value whether the control
valve is at its upper
limit.
QLMNR_HS = TRUE
means: The control
limit.
(For step controllers
only)


assign-
ment
screen
form
40.6 QLMNR_LS BOOL Low limit signal FALSE The output "Lower end -
of repeated stop signal of position
manipulated feedback" indicates
value whether the control
valve is at its lower
limit.
QLMNR_LS = TRUE
means: The control
limit.
only)
40.7 QLMNR_ON BOOL Repeated FALSE The output "position -
manipulated feedback on" shows the
value on set mode "step
controller with position
feedback" or "step
controller without
position feedback".
41.0 QFUZZY BOOL PID FALSE If the output -
algorithm = 0 QFUZZY = 1 is set, the
fuzzy = 1 controller operates with
the fuzzy algorithm.
41.1 QSPLEPV BOOL Fuzzy display: FALSE The output "Display of -
Setpoint < FUZZY controller: set
process variable value < actual value" is
set when the fuzzy
controller is switched
on, if the set value is
less than the effective
actual value.
41.2 QSPR BOOL Split-range FALSE If the output "Split- -
operation range operation" is set,
the continuous
controller is operating in
split-range mode.


assign-
ment
screen
form
41.4 QMAN_FC BOOL Manual mode or FALSE The output "QMAN_FC" -
anti-reset- is set in the following
windup by two cases:
follower the slave controller is in
controller manual mode and the
main controller is
followed up to the
actual value of the
slave controller.
The I-action component
of the master controller
is stopped because the
setpoint value or
manipulated variable of
the secondary
controller is limited or
because the secondary
controller is in manual
mode.
41.7 QPARABUB BOOL Internal value FALSE This parameter is set -
by the FM when
operating parameters
are changed via the
OP. If READ_VAR =
TRUE and if this
display is set by the
FM, the PID_FM FB
reads the parameters
SP_OP_ON,
LMNOP_ON, SP_OP
and LMN_OP out of the
FM and saves them in
the instance DB. The
FB thus takes over the
operating state of the
FM. After the reading
process the parameter
is set to FALSE.


assign-
ment
screen
form
42.0 QMOD_F BOOL Module error FALSE The function block -
checks correct reading
and writing of a data
record. In the case of
detected errors the
output "Module error" is
set. The error cause
can be: An incorrect
module address at the
parameter
MOD_ADDR, an
incorrect channel
number at the
parameter CHANNEL
or a defective module.
In/Out Parameters
Table 11-3 I/O parameters of the instance DB for the PID_FM FB
Addr. Parameter Data Comment Permitted range of Default Explanation In para-

type English values setting meter
configu-
ration
mask
44.0 COM_RST BOOL Read control FALSE If the parameter -
parameters from COM_RST = TRUE is
FM 355/455 set, the PID_FM FB
carries out an
initialization run. In the
process the control
parameters (all the
parameters after
cont_par) are read from
the FM and stored in the
instance DB. In addition,
the validity of the
parameters MOD_ADDR
and CHANNEL is
checked. After the
initialization run the
parameter is set to
FALSE.


configu-
ration
mask
44.1 LOAD_OP BOOL Load operator FALSE If the through parameter -
parameter to "Load operator parameter
FM 355/455 to FM 355/455" is set, the
operating parameters are
loaded into the module
and the through
parameter is reset.
44.2 READ_VAR BOOL Read variables FALSE If the through parameter -
from FM 355/455 "Read variables from FM
355/455" is set, the
output parameters are
read from the module
and the through
parameter is reset.
44.3 LOAD_PAR BOOL Load control FALSE If the through parameter -
parameter to "Load control parameter
FM 355/455 to FM 355/455" is set, the
control parameters are
loaded into the module
and the through
parameter is reset.
46.0 op_par WOR Begin of W#16#3130 W#16#3 The op_par parameter -
D operating 1302) may not be overwritten by
parameters the user. It identifies the
start of the operator
parameters that are
transferred to the
module, if LOAD_OP =
TRUE is set. The end of
the operating parameter
is shown by cont_par.
48.0 SP_RE REAL External setpoint Technical range of 0.0 An external setpoint is -
values connected to the
(physical variable) controller at the "external
setpoint" input.
52.0 LMN_RE REAL External -100.0...100.0 (%) 0.0 An external manipulated -
manipulated value is interconnected to
value the controller at the input
"External manipulated
value".
56.0 SP_OP_ON1) BOOL Setpoint FALSE The configuration tool -
operation on has access to the
through parameter
"Setpoint operation on". If
the bit is set, the value
setpoint value.


configu-
ration
mask
56.1 SAFE_ON BOOL Safety position FALSE If the "assume safety -
on position" input is set, a
security value is adopted
as the manipulated value.
Note: The actuating
signal processing via
LMNDN_OP,
LMNUP_OP and
LMNSOPON with step
controllers has greater
priority than the safety
56.2 LMNOP_ON BOOL Manipulated FALSE The configuration tool -
1) value operation has access to the
on through parameter
"Manipulated variable
operation on". If the bit is
set, the value LMN_OP is
used as the manipulated
value.
56.3 LMNTRKON BOOL Match (LMN from FALSE If the input "Track (LMN -
analog input) via analog input)" is set,
the manipulated value is
tracked to an analog
input.
feedback).
56.4 LMN_REON BOOL External FALSE If the input "Switch -
manipulated external manipulated
value on value on" is set, the
external manipulated
value LMN_RE is used as
the manipulated value.
56.5 LMNRHSRE BOOL High limit signal FALSE The signal "Manipulated -
of repeated valve on high stop" is
manipulated switched on the "high
value stop signal of the position
feedback" input.
LMNRHSRE = TRUE
means: The control valve
is at its upper limit.
(For step controllers only)


configu-
ration
mask
56.6 LMNRLSRE BOOL Low limit signal FALSE The signal "Manipulated -
of repeated valve on low stop" is
manipulated switched on the "low stop
value signal of the position
feedback" input.
LMNRLSRE = TRUE
means: The control valve
is at its lower limit.
56.7 LMNSOPON BOOL Manipulated FALSE If the bit on the input -
1) signal operation "Manipulated value signal
on operation on" is set, the
signals LMNUP_OP and
LMNDN_OP are adopted
as the manipulated value
signals.
57.0 LMNUP_OP BOOL Manipulated FALSE If LMNSOPON is set, the -
1) signal up value at the input
operation "Manipulated value signal
up operation" as the
manipulated value signal.
57.1 LMNDN_OP BOOL Manipulated FALSE If LMNSOPON is set, the -
1) signal down value at the input
operation "Manipulated value signal
down operation" as the
manipulated value signal.


configu-
ration
mask
57.3 LMNRS_ON BOOL Simulation of the FALSE If no position feedback is -
repeated available, this can be
manipulated simulated. The function is
value on switched on on the input
"simulation of the position
feedback on". The
configuration tool
(controller optimization)
also has access to these
parameters, as at least
one simulated
manipulated variable is
required for optimization
if a step controller without
being configured. The
simulated value is
displayed at the
parameter LMN_A. When
the simulation is
activated, the value of the
parameter LMNRSVAL is
set as the start value.
CAUTION: Over time the
simulation deviates
increasingly from the true
position feedback.
(Only in the case of step
controllers without analog
position feedback)
57.4 FUZID_ON BOOL Fuzzy FALSE The identification of the -
identification on fuzzy algorithm is
activated at the input
"Switch fuzzy
identification on".
58.0 SP_OP1) REAL Setpoint Technical range of 0.0 The configuration tool -
operation values (controller optimization)
(physical variable) has access to the
through parameter
"Setpoint operation". If
the bit SP_OP_ON is set,
the value "Setpoint
operation" is used as the
setpoint value.


configu-
ration
mask
62.0 LMN_OP1) REAL Manipulated -100.0...100.0 (%) 0.0 The configuration tool -
value operation has access to the
through parameter
operation". If the bit
LMNOP_ON is set, the
value "Manipulated value
operation" is used as the
manipulated value.
66.0 LMNRSVAL REAL Start value of the -100.0...100.0 (%) 0.0 The configuration tool -
repeated (controller optimization)
manipulated has access to the input
value in "Start value of the
simulation simulated position
feedback". The start
value of the simulation is
entered at the parameter.
(Only in the case of step
controllers without analog
position feedback)
70.0 cont_par WOR Begin of control W#16#3130 W#16#3 The cont_par parameter -
D parameters 1302) may not be overwritten by
the user. It characterizes
the start of the controller
parameter that is read
from the FM and stored in
the instance DB, if
COM_RST = TRUE and
which is transferred to the
FM when LOAD_PAR =
TRUE. The end of the
controller parameter is
the end of the instance
DB.
72.0 P_SEL BOOL P action on TRUE 2) The PID algorithm allows PID
individual PID-actions to Controlle
be switched on and off. r
The proportional action is
activated when the
"Activate P-action
component" input is set.
72.1 PFDB_SEL BOOL P action in FALSE In the PID algorithm, the PID
feedback path 2) P and D actions can be Controlle
included in the feedback r
path. The proportional
action is in the feedback
path when the "P-action
component in the
feedback" input is set.


configu-
ration
mask
72.2 MONERSEL BOOL Monitoring: FALSE The controller possesses Alarm
process 2) a limit value detector that controller
variable = 0 can be applied either for
error signal = 1 the actual value or for the
error signal. If the input
"Monitoring: actual value
= 0, control deviation = 1"
is set, the control
deviation will be
monitored.
74.0 D_EL_SEL INT D-element input 0 to 4 or 17 0 2) The D-element in the PID control
for the controller algorithm can be laid to a deviation
separate input. This is (...)
selected at the input "D- controller
element input".
0: Error signal/Negative
deviation
1 to 4: Analog input 1 to 4
17: Negative actual
process value, D-action
component in the
feedback
76.0 SP_HLM REAL Setpoint high > SP_LLM 100.0 The setpoint is always Limiting
limit (physical variable) 2) limited to a high and a setpoint
low limit. The "Setpoint controller
high limit" input specifies
the upper limit.
80.0 SP_LLM REAL Setpoint low limit < SP_HLM 0.0 The setpoint is always Limiting
(physical variable) 2) limited to a high and a setpoint
low limit. The "Setpoint controller
low limit" input specifies
the lower limit.
84.0 H_ALM REAL High limit alarm > H_WRN 100.0 Four limits can be Alarm
(physical variable) 2) assigned for monitoring controller
the process variable or
the negative deviation.
The "Upper limit alarm"
input specifies the
highest limit.
88.0 H_WRN REAL High limit H_ALM...L_WRN 90.0 Four limits can be Alarm
warning (physical variable) 2) assigned for monitoring controller
The "Upper limit warning"
input specifies the
second high limit.


configu-
ration
mask
92.0 L_WRN REAL Low limit warning H_WRN...L_ALM 10.0 Four limits can be Alarm
The "Lower limit warning"
input specifies the
second lower limit.
96.0 L_ALM REAL Low limit alarm < L_WRN 0.0 Four limits can be Alarm
The "Lower limit alarm"
specifies the lowest limit.
100.0 HYS REAL Hysteresis ≥ 0.0 1.0 To prevent flickering of Alarm
(physical variable) 2) the monitoring displays a controller
hysteresis can be
configured at the
"hysteresis" input.
104.0 DEADB_W REAL Dead band width ≥ 0.0 0.0 A dead band is applied to Dead
(physical variable) 2) the negative deviation. band
The "Dead band width" controller
input determines the size
of the dead band.
108.0 GAIN REAL Proportional gain Complete range of 1.0 The input "proportional PID
values 2) gain" indicates the Control-
(dimensionless) controller gain. ler
112.0 TI REAL Reset time (s) = 0.0 or ≥ 0.5 3000.0 The "integration time" PID
2) input determines the time Control-
response of the ler
integrator. If TI = 0, the
integrator is deactivated
116.0 TD REAL Derivative time = 0.0 or ≥ 1.0 0.0 The "derivative time" PID
(s) 2) input determines the time Control-
response of the ler
derivative unit. If TD = 0,
the derivative unit is de-
activated.
120.0 TM_LAG REAL Time lag of the TM_LAG ≥ 0.5 5.0 The algorithm of the D- PID
derivative action 2) action includes a time lag Control-
(s) that can be assigned to ler
the "Time lag of the
derivative action (s)"
input.
124.0 LMN_SAFE REAL Safety -100.0...100.0 (%) 0.0 For the manipulated Switching
manipulated 2) value, a security value to safety
value can be configured on the manipula
Safety "Security manipulated ted value
manipulated value" input. controller
variable


configu-
ration
mask
128.0 LMN_HLM REAL Manipulated LMN_LLM...100.0 100.0 The manipulated variable Limits of
value high limit (%) 2) is always limited to an manipula
Upper limit of high and a low limit. The ted value
manipulated "Upper limit of controller
value manipulated value" input
specifies the upper limit.
feedback).
132.0 LMN_LLM REAL Manipulated -100.0...LMN_HLM 0.0 The manipulated variable Limits of
value low limit (%) 2) is always limited to an manipula
Lower limit of high and a low limit. The ted value
manipulated "Lower limit of controller
value manipulated value" input
specifies the lower limit.
feedback).
136.0 MTR_TM REAL Motor MTR_TM ≥ 0.001 60.0 The actuating time from Pulse-
manipulated 2) end stop to end stop of shaper
value (s) the control valve is controller
Motor actuating entered in the ”Motor
time (s) actuating time”
parameter.
(Applies only to step
controllers)
140.0 PULSE_TM REAL Minimum pulse ≥ 0.0 0.2 A minimum pulse length Pulse-
time (s) 2) can be configured on the shaper
Minimum pulse "minimum pulse time" controller
width (s) parameter. Split-
(For step controllers or range
pulse controllers only) function/
Pulse
generator
controller
144.0 BREAK_TM REAL Minimum break ≥ 0.0 0.2 A minimum pulse Pulse-
time (s) 2) duration can be assigned shaper
Minimum with the parameter controller
interpulse width "Minimum break time." Split-
(s) (For step controllers or range/
pulse controllers only) pulse
generator
controller
1) You can also change these parameters via the loop display.
2) Default values of the module after the first start-up of the PID_FM FB with COM_RST = TRUE

11.2 Instance DB of the FUZ_355 FB
Note
If LOAD_PAR = TRUE is set, all the control parameters are loaded permanently to the
EEPROM of the FM 355.
With LOAD_OP = TRUE only the setpoint SP_RE of the operator parameters is loaded
permanently to the EEPROM of the FM 355. All the other operator parameters have the
values 0 or FALSE pre-assigned during the FM 355 startup.
The EEPROM of the module could be destroyed by excessive writing processes. In order to
prevent this the module delays renewed writing to the EEPROM by 30 minutes.
See also
Error display from the group error LED (Page 12-1)
11.2 11.2 Instance DB of the FUZ_355 FB
Introduction
The FUZ_355 FB can be used to read the controller parameters of the fuzzy temperature
controller out of the FM 355. You can then, for example, transfer these parameters back to
the module after you have replaced the FM 355.
Note
You may not change the parameters determined through identification by the FM 355 since
they have been optimized for the process.


Input Parameters
Table 11-4 Input parameters of the instance DB for the FUZ_355 FB

configu-
ration
mask
0.0 MOD_ADDR INT FM 355/455 256 This input contains the -
module address module address
resulting from the
configuration with
STEP 7.
Output Parameters
Table 11-5 Output parameters of the instance DB for the FUZ_355 FB
Addr- Parameter Data Comment Permitted range of Default Explanation In the

assign-
ment
screen
form
2.0 RET_VALU WORD Return value 0 RET_VALU includes -
SFC 58/59. With the
block for PROFINET
Mode, the RET_VAL
3rd bytes from the
STATUS parameter of
the SFB 52/53.
RET_VALU can be
reported via the
QMOD_F (see

Addr- Parameter Data Comment Permitted range of Default Explanation In the

assign-
ment
screen
form
4.0 PARAFFUZ WORD Parameter fault 0 On the PARAFFUZ -
display parameter a
parameterization error
created by the FB
FUZ_355 is displayed
as follows:
High byte of
PARAFFUZ = 01: A
parameter
configuration error
exists.
High byte of
PARAFFUZ = 00: A
parameter
configuration error
does not exist.
The low byte contains
the offset of the
parameter that caused
the parameter
configuration error,
calculated from the
static variable
FUZ_PAR[1].
6.0 READ_PAR BOOL Read fuzzy FALSE If the READ_PAR -
parameters parameter is set, the
fuzzy parameters are
read out of the module
and stored in the static
variables of the
instance DB.
6.1 LOAD_PAR BOOL Write fuzzy FALSE If the LOAD_PAR -
parameters parameter is set, the
fuzzy parameters are
read out of the static
variables of the
instance DB module
and transferred to the
module.

11.3 Instance DB of the FB FORCE355
11.3 11.3 Instance DB of the FB FORCE355
Introduction
The FB FORCE355 is required to simulate analog or digital input values of the FM 355.
Input Parameters
Table 11-6 Input parameters of the instance DB for the FORCE355 FB

assign-
ment
screen
form
0.0 S_AION ARRAY Switch: simulation FALSE If, for example, the -
[1..4] of of analog input by S_AION[1] switch is
BOOL PV_SIM set to TRUE, the value
PV_SIM[1] is used
instead of the analog
input value 1 of the
module.
2.0 S_PVON ARRAY Switch: simulation FALSE If, for example, the -
[1..4] of of linearized S_PVON[1] switch is
BOOL analog input by set to TRUE, the value
PV_SIM PV_SIM[1] is used
instead of the
conditioned analog
module.


assign-
ment
screen
form
4.0 PV_SIM ARRAY Simulated analog 0.0 to 20.0 [mA] or 0.0 For example, input -
[1..4] of input value -1500 to PV_SIM[1] specifies
REAL +10000 [mV] or the simulation value for
technical range of the analog input 1. If
values S_PVON = TRUE,
then the preprocessed
analog input value is
specified in this case.
If S_PVON = FALSE
and S_AION = TRUE
then the analog input
value, which is
transformed into a
preprocessed value by
means of the
preprocessing
functions, is specified
in mA or mV.
20.0 S_DION ARRAY Switch: simulation FALSE If, for example, -
[1..8] of of digital input by S_DION[1] is set to
BOOL DI_SIM TRUE, the value
DI_SIM[1] is used as
the digital value
instead of the digital
module.
22.0 DI_SIM ARRAY Simulated digital FALSE -
[1..8] of input value
BOOL
24.0 MOD_ADDR INT FM 355/455 256 The module address -
module address that resulted from the
configuration with
input.

Output Parameters
Table 11-7 Output parameters of the instance DB to the FB FORCE355

assign-
ment
screen
form
SFC 58/59. With the
block for PROFINET
Mode, the RET_VAL
3rd bytes from the
STATUS parameter of
the SFB 52/53.
RET_VALU can be
reported via the
QMOD_F (see

11.4 Instance DB of the READ_355 FB
11.4 11.4 Instance DB of the READ_355 FB
Introduction
The READ_355 FB is required to read analog or digital input values out of the FM 355.
Input Parameters
Table 11-8 Input parameters of the instance DB for the READ_355 FB

assign-
ment
screen
form
0.0 MOD_ADDR INT FM 355/455 256 This input contains the -
module address module address
resulting from the
configuration with
STEP 7.
Output Parameters
Table 11-9 Output parameters of the instance DB for the READ_355 FB
Addr. Parameter Data type Comment Permitted range of Default Explanation In the
English values setting parameter
assign-
ment
screen
form
2.0 CJ_TEMP REAL Cold junction 0.0 On the CJ_TEMP -
temperature output, the measured
reference junction
temperature is
displayed by the
module if a
thermocouple element
input is configured and
the reference junction
temperature is not
configured.

11.4 Instance DB of the READ_355 FB
Addr. Parameter Data type Comment Permitted range of Default Explanation In the
English values setting parameter
assign-
ment
screen
form
6.0 STAT_DI ARRAY[1. Status of binary FALSE The states of digital -
.8] of input DI1 to DI8 inputs 1 to 8 are
BOOL displayed at the
STAT_DI parameters.
(channel DIAG[x].P ARRAY Analog input (0 0.0 The parameter -

number) V_PER [1..4] of to 20mA, -1500 DIAG[1].PV_PER
x8 STRUCT to 10000 mV) displays, for example,
the analog input value
of the module in the
unit mA or mV.
(channel DIAG[x].P ARRAY Linearized 0.0 The conditioned -
number) V_PHY [1..4] of analog input analog input value of
x8+4 STRUCT (physical) the module is, for
example, displayed at
the parameter
DIAG[1].PV_PHY.
40.0 RET_VAL WORD Return value 0 RET_VALU includes -
U SFC 58/59 the return value
SFC 58/59. With the
block for PROFINET
Mode, the RET_VAL
3rd bytes from the
STATUS parameter of
the SFB 52/53.
RET_VALU can be
reported via the
QMOD_F (see

11.5 Instance DB of the CH_DIAG FB
11.5 11.5 Instance DB of the CH_DIAG FB
Introduction
The FB CH_DIAG is needed to read out additional channel-specific diagnostic variables from
the module.
Input Parameters
Table 11-10 Input parameters of the instance DB for the CH_DIAG FB

assign-
ment
screen
form
configuration with
input.
refers is configured at
the "Channel number"
input.
4.0 SP_R REAL Setpoint ratio 0.0 If a ratio controller is -
set, the input value of
the setpoint value is
assigned to the
parameter.
8.0 PV_R REAL Process variable 0.0 The parameter only -
ratio has the following value
assigned to it at a set
ratio controller:
(Process value A -
Setpoint value offset) /
Process value D


assign-
ment
screen
form
12.0 DIF_I REAL Derivative unit 0.0 The input variable of -
input the D-action
component at the
DIF_I parameter. This
is particularly of
interest if, for example,
an analog input is
configured as the input
variable of the D-action
component.
16.0 TRACKPER REAL Input value for 0.0 The TRACKPER -
LMN tracking parameter shows the
input size at which the
set value is being
followed up if the
to set value follow-up.
20.0 IDSTATUS WORD Status of 0.0 This parameter is -
identification described in chapter
"Parameter
optimization with
temperature
controllers".
22.0 LMN_P REAL Proportionality 0.0 The P part of the -
component manipulated variable is
shown on the LMN_P
parameter.
26.0 LMN_I REAL Integral 0.0 The I-action -
component component of the
manipulated variable is
displayed at the LMN_I
parameter.
30.0 LMN_D REAL Derivative 0.0 The D part of the -
component manipulated variable is
shown on the LMN_D
parameter.

Output Parameters
Table 11-11 Output parameters of the instance DB for the CH_DIAG FB
Ad- Parameter Data Comment Permitted range of Default Explanation In the

dress type English values setting parameter
assign-
ment
screen
form
SFC 58/59. With the
block for PROFINET
Mode, the RET_VAL
3rd bytes from the
STATUS parameter of
the SFB 52/53.
RET_VALU can be
reported via the
QMOD_F (see

11.6 Instance DB of the PID_PAR FB
11.6 11.6 Instance DB of the PID_PAR FB
Introduction
The FB PID_PAR is used to change parameters on-line which are not contained in FB
PID_FM.
Input Parameters
Table 11-12 Input parameters of the instance DB for the PID_PAR FB

assign-
ment
screen
form
0.0 COM_RST BOOL Read parameters TRUE If the parameter -
from system data COM_RST = TRUE is
set, the PID_PAR FB
carries out an
process the
parameters are read
from the system data
of the CPU and saved
in the instance DB.
configuration with
input.
is referenced is
configured at input
"channel number".
6.0 INDEX_R INT Index for REAL- 0 to 48 0.0 Refer to the section -
parameter "The PID_PAR
Function Block"
8.0 VALUE_R REAL Value for REAL- Depending on the 0.0 Refer to the section -
parameter respective "The PID_PAR
parameter Function Block"
12.0 INDEX_I INT Index for INT 0.49 to 61 0.0 Refer to the section -
Function Block"

11.6 Instance DB of the PID_PAR FB

assign-
ment
screen
form
14.0 VALUE_I INT Value for INT Depending on the 0.0 Refer to the section -
parameter respective "The PID_PAR
Output Parameters
Table 11-13 Output parameters of the instance DB for the PID_PAR FB

assign-
ment
screen
form
SFC 58/59. With the
block for PROFINET
Mode, the RET_VAL
3rd bytes from the
STATUS parameter of
the SFB 52/53.
RET_VALU can be
reported via the
QMOD_F (see
18.0 BUSY BOOL BUSY value of FALSE If BUSY = TRUE, the -
SFC WR_REC parameters have not
SFB WRREC yet been transferred
from the module (at
distributed I/Os). The
call of the PID_PAR
FB should then be
repeated in the next
cycle.
See also

11.7 Instance DB of the CJ_T_PAR FB
11.7 11.7 Instance DB of the CJ_T_PAR FB
Introduction
The FB JC_T_PAR is used to change the configured reference junction temperature on the
module on-line.
Input Parameters
Table 11-14 Input parameters of the instance DB for the CJ_T_PAR FB
Addr. Parameter Data Comment Permitted range Default Explanation In the

type English of values setting parameter
assign-
ment
screen
form
0.0 COM_RST BOOL Read parameters - If the parameter -
from system data COM_RST = TRUE is
set, the CJ_T_PAR FB
carries out an
process the
parameters are read
in the instance DB.
configuration with
input.
4.0 CJ_T REAL Cold junction Depending on 0.0 The reference junction -
temperature the sensor type temperature can be
specified at the CJ_T
parameter.

11.7 Instance DB of the CJ_T_PAR FB
Output Parameters
Table 11-15 Output parameters of the instance DB for the CJ_T_PAR FB
Addr. Parameter Data Comment Permitted range Default Explanation In the

type English of values setting parameter
assign-
ment
screen
form
SFC 58/59. With the
block for PROFINET
Mode, the RET_VAL
3rd bytes from the
STATUS parameter of
the SFB 52/53.
RET_VALU can be
reported via the
QMOD_F (see
10.0 BUSY BOOL BUSY value of FALSE If BUSY = TRUE, the -
SFC 59 parameters have not
SFB 53 yet been transferred
from the module (at
call of the PID_PAR
FB should then be
repeated in the next
cycle.

11.8 Assignment of the DBs for Operator Control and Monitoring via OP
11.8 11.8 Assignment of the DBs for Operator Control and Monitoring via OP
Introduction
The variable interface of the FM 355 contains four data blocks with the block numbers 101 to
104 for the controller channels 1 to 4 that are used for operator control and monitoring of the
FM 355 via an OP.
The following tables list the parameters of these instance DBs:
• In/Out parameters
Input Parameters
Table 11-16 Input parameters of the DBs for operator control and monitoring

assign-
ment
screen
form
0.0 SP_HLM REAL Setpoint high limit > SP_LLM 100.0 The setpoint is Limiting
1) (physical variable) always limited by an setpoint
upper and lower limit. controller
The "Setpoint high
limit" input specifies
the upper limit.
4.0 SP_LLM REAL Setpoint low limit < SP_HLM 0.0 The setpoint is Limiting
1) (physical variable) always limited by an setpoint
upper and lower limit. controller
The "Setpoint low
limit" input specifies
the lower limit.
8.0 H_ALM REAL High limit alarm > H_WRN 100.0 Four limits can be Alarm
1) (physical variable) assigned for controller
monitoring the
process variable or
the negative
deviation. The "Upper
limit alarm" input
specifies the highest
limit.


assign-
ment
screen
form
12.0 H_WRN REAL High limit warning H_ALM...L_WRN 90.0 Four limits can be Alarm
monitoring the
process variable or
the negative
deviation. The "Upper
limit warning" input
specifies the second
high limit.
16.0 L_WRN REAL Low limit warning H_WRN...L_ALM 10.0 Four limits can be Alarm
monitoring the
process variable or
the negative
deviation. The "Lower
limit warning" input
specifies the second
lower limit.
20.0 L_ALM REAL Low limit alarm < L_WRN 0.0 Four limits can be Alarm
monitoring the
process variable or
the negative
deviation. The "Lower
limit alarm" specifies
the lowest limit.
24.0 HYS REAL Hysteresis ≥ 0.0 1.0 To prevent flickering Alarm
1) (physical variable) of the monitoring controller
displays a hysteresis
can be configured at
the "hysteresis" input.
28.0 DEADB_W REAL Dead band width ≥ 0.0 0.0 A dead band is Dead
1) (physical variable) applied to the band
negative deviation. controller
The "Dead band
width" input
determines the size
of the dead band.
32.0 GAIN REAL Proportional gain Complete range of 1.0 The input PID
1) values "proportional gain" Controller
(dimensionless) indicates the
controller gain.
36.0 TI REAL Reset time (s) = 0.0 or ≥ 0.5 3000.0 The "integration time" PID
1) input determines the Controller
time response of the
integrator. If TI = 0,
the integrator is
deactivated


assign-
ment
screen
form
40.0 TD REAL Derivative time (s) = 0.0 or ≥ 1.0 0.0 The "derivative time" PID
1) input determines the Controller
time response of the
derivative unit. If
TD = 0, the derivative
unit is de-activated.
44.0 TM_LAG REAL Time lag of the TM_LAG ≥ 0.5 5.0 The algorithm of the PID
1) derivative action D part includes a time Controller
(s) lag that can be
assigned to the "Time
lag of the D part"
input.
48.0 LMN_SAFE REAL Safety -100.0...100.0 (%) 0.0 For the manipulated Switching
1) manipulated value value, a security to safety
value can be manipulat
configured on the ed value
"Security manipulated controller
value" input.
52.0 LMN_HLM REAL Manipulated value LMN_LLM...100.0 100.0 The manipulated Limits of
1) high limit (%) variable is always manipulat
limited to an high and ed value
a low limit. The controller
"Upper limit of
manipulated value"
input specifies the
upper limit.
(this does not apply
to step-action
controllers without
analog position
feedback).
56.0 LMN_LLM REAL Manipulated value -100.0...LMN_HLM 0.0 The manipulated Limits of
1) low limit (%) variable is always manipulat
limited to an high and ed value
a low limit. The controller
"Lower limit of
manipulated value"
input specifies the
lower limit.
to step-action
controllers without
analog position
feedback).


assign-
ment
screen
form
60.0 MTR_TM REAL Motor manipulated MTR_TM ≥ 0.001 60.0 The actuating time Pulse-
1) value (s) from end stop to end shaper
stop of the control controller
valve is entered in the
”Motor actuating time”
parameter.
only)
64.0 PULSE_TM REAL Minimum pulse ≥ 0.0 0.2 A minimum pulse Pulse-
1) time (s) length can be shaper
configured on the controller
"minimum pulse time" Split-
parameter. range
(applies to step function/P
controllers or pulse ulse
controllers only) generator
controller
68.0 BREAK_TM REAL Minimum break ≥ 0.0 0.2 A minimum pulse Pulse-
1) time (s) duration can be shaper
assigned with the controller
parameter "Minimum Split-
break time." range
(applies to step function/P
controllers or pulse ulse
controllers only) generator
controller
72.0 SP_RE REAL External setpoint Technical range of 0.0 An external setpoint -
2) values is connected to the
physical variable) controller at the
"external setpoint"
input.
76.0 LMN_RE REAL External -100.0...100.0 (%) 0.0 An external -
2) manipulated value manipulated value is
interconnected to the
controller at the input
"External
manipulated value".
80.0 LMNRSVAL REAL Start value of the -100.0...100.0 (%) 0.0 The configuration tool -
2) repeated has access to the
manipulated value input "Start value of
in simulation the simulated position
feedback". The start
value of the
simulation is entered
at the parameter.
(Only in the case of
step controllers
without analog
position feedback)


assign-
ment
screen
form
84.0 SAFE_ON BOOL Safety position on FALSE If the "assume safety -
2) position" input is set,
a security value is
adopted as the
manipulated value.
Note: The actuating
signal processing via
LMNDN_OP,
LMNUP_OP and
LMNSOPON with
step controllers has
greater priority than
the safety
84.1 LMNTRKON BOOL Match (LMN from FALSE If the input "Track -
2) analog input) (LMN via analog
input)" is set, the
tracked to an analog
input.
to step-action
controllers without
analog position
feedback).
84.2 LMN_REON BOOL External FALSE If the input "Switch -
2) manipulated value external manipulated
on value on" is set, the
external manipulated
value LMN_RE is
used as the
manipulated value.
84.3 LMNRHSRE BOOL High limit signal of FALSE The signal -
2) repeated "Manipulated valve
manipulated value on high stop" is
switched on the "high
stop signal of the
position feedback"
input.
LMNRHSRE = TRUE
means: The control
limit.
only)


assign-
ment
screen
form
84.4 LMNRLSRE BOOL Low limit signal of FALSE The signal -
2) repeated "Manipulated valve
manipulated value on low stop" is
switched on the "low
stop signal of the
position feedback"
input.
LMNRLSRE = TRUE
means: The control
limit.
only)
84.5 LMNSOPON BOOL Manipulated signal FALSE If the bit on the input -
2) operation on "Manipulated value
signal operation on"
is set, the signals
LMNUP_OP and
LMNDN_OP are
adopted as the
manipulated value
signals.
only)
84.6 LMNUP_OP BOOL Manipulated signal FALSE If LMNSOPON is set, -
2) up operation the value at the input
"Manipulated value
signal up operation"
as the manipulated
value signal.
only)
84.7 LMNDN_OP BOOL Manipulated signal FALSE If LMNSOPON is set, -
2) down operation the value at the input
"Manipulated value
signal down
operation" as the
manipulated value
signal.
only)


assign-
ment
screen
form
85.0 MONERSEL BOOL Monitoring: FALSE The controller Alarm
1) Process possesses a limit controller
variable = 0 Error value detector that
signal = 1 can be applied either
for the actual value or
for the error signal. If
the input "Monitoring:
actual value = 0,
control deviation = 1"
is set, the control
deviation will be
monitored.
85.1 LMNRS_ON BOOL Simulation of the FALSE If no position -
2) repeated feedback is available,
manipulated value this can be simulated.
on The function is
switched on on the
input "simulation of
the position feedback
on".
CAUTION: Over time
the simulation
deviates increasingly
from the true position
feedback.
(Only in the case of
step controllers
without analog
position feedback)
85.2 FUZID_ON BOOL Fuzzy identification FALSE The identification of -
2) on the fuzzy algorithm is
activated at the input
"Switch fuzzy
identification on".
85.3 SPINT_EN BOOL Operator input: FALSE The input "operating -
2) external = 0 input: external = 0,
internal = 1 internal = 1"
determines the input
that is transferred as
a set value to the
module.
SPINT_EN = TRUE:
SP_INT is
transferred.
SPINT_EN = FALSE:
SP_RE is transferred.


assign-
ment
screen
form
85.4 P_SEL BOOL P action on TRUE The PID algorithm PID
1) allows individual PID- Controller
actions to be
switched on and off.
The proportional
action is activated
when the "Activate P-
action component"
input is set.
85.5 PFDB_SEL BOOL P action in FALSE In the PID algorithm, PID
1) feedback path the P and D actions Controller
can be included in the
feedback path. The
proportional action is
in the feedback path
when the "P-action
component in the
feedback" input is
set.
86.0 D_EL_SEL INT D-element input for 0 to 4 or 17 0 The D element in the control
1) the controller PID algorithm can be deviation
placed at a separate (...)
input. This is selected controller
at the input "D-
element input".
0: Error
signal/Negative
deviation
1 to 4: Analog input 1
to 4
17: Negative actual
process value
1) Control parameters
Control parameters are downloaded to the module if the I/O parameter LOAD_PAR is set. All the control parameters
are loaded permanently to the EEPROM of the FM 355.
2) Operatingparameters:
Operating parameters are downloaded to the module if the I/O parameter LOAD_OP is set.
Only the setpoint SP_RE of the operator parameters is loaded permanently to the EEPROM of the FM 355. All the other
operator parameters have the values 0 or FALSE pre-assigned during the FM 355 startup.
Note
The EEPROM of the module could be destroyed by excessive writing processes. In order to
prevent this the module delays renewed writing to the EEPROM by 30 minutes.

Output Parameters
Table 11-17 Output parameters of the DBs for operator control and monitoring

type English values setting para-
meter
assign-
ment
screen
form
94.0 SP REAL Setpoint Technical range of 0.0 The setpoint value that -
values is currently in effect is
(physical variable) available at the
"Setpoint" output.
98.0 PV REAL Process variable Technical range of 0.0 The effective process -
values variable is output at the
(physical variable) "process variable"
output.
102.0 ER REAL Error signal Technical range of 0.0 The effective negative -
values deviation is output at
(physical variable) the "Negative
deviation" output.
106.0 DISV REAL Disturbance variable -100.0...100.0 (%) 0.0 The effective -
disturbance variable is
output at the
"Disturbance variable"
output.
110.0 LMN REAL Manipulated value -100.0...100.0 (%) 0.0 The effective -
output at the
"Manipulated value"
output. At a step
controller without
analog position
feedback the unlimited
P- + D-action
component is output at
the LMN parameter.


meter
assign-
ment
screen
form
114.0 LMN_A REAL Manipulated value A -100.0...100.0 (%) 0.0 On the output -
of split range "Manipulated value A of
function/repeated the split range function
manipulated value / position feedback" in
the case of continuous
controllers the
manipulated value A of
the split range function,
and with step
controllers with analog
position feedback, the
displayed.
In the case of step
controllers without
analog position
feedback the simulated
displayed.
118.0 LMN_B REAL Manipulated value B -100.0...100.0 (%) 0.0 Manipulated value B of -
of split range the split-range function
function is displayed at the
output "Manipulated
value B of the split-
range function§ at a
continuous-action
controller.
122.0 QH_ALM BOOL High limit alarm FALSE The actual value or the -
monitored for four
at the "Upper limit
122.1 QH_WRN BOOL High limit warning FALSE The actual value or the -
monitored for four
limit H_WRN is
signaled at the "Upper
output.


meter
assign-
ment
screen
form
122.2 QL_WRN BOOL Lower limit warning FALSE The actual value or the -
monitored for four
limit H_WRN is
signaled at the "Lower
output.
122.3 QL_ALM BOOL Low limit alarm FALSE The actual value or the -
monitored for four
at the "Lower limit
122.4 QLMN_HLM BOOL High limit of FALSE The manipulated -
manipulated value variable is always
reached limited to an high and a
low limit. The "high limit
reached" output
displays the exceeding
of the upper limit.
feedback).
122.5 QLMN_LLM BOOL Low limit of FALSE The manipulated -
manipulated value variable is always
reached limited to an high and a
reached" output
displays the falling
short of the low limit.
feedback).
122.6 QSPINTON BOOL Internal setpoint on FALSE The output "Internal -
setpoint on" indicates
that SP_INT was
transferred to the
module.


meter
assign-
ment
screen
form
123.0 QPARA_F BOOL Parameter FALSE The module checks the -
assignment error validity of the
parameters. A
parameter configuration
error is displayed at the
"Parameter
configuration error"
output. You can also
read out these
parameter assignment
errors by using the PLC
> Parameter
Assignment Error
menu of the parameter
123.1 QCH_F BOOL Channel error FALSE The output "Channel -
error" is set if the
controller channel
cannot supply any valid
results. "Channel error"
(e.g. wire break) is also
set if QPARA_F = 1 or
QMOD_F = 1. If
QCH_F = TRUE, then
the precise error
information in the
diagnostic record DS1
of the module is read
off.
123.2 QUPRLM BOOL Limit of positive FALSE The setpoint is limited -
setpoint inclination to a positive and
reached negative gradient. If the
output "Limit of positive
setpoint inclination
triggered" is set, the
positive setpoint
inclination is limited.
123.3 QDNRLM BOOL Limit of negative FALSE The setpoint is limited -
setpoint inclination to a positive and
reached negative gradient. If the
"negative set value
inclination reached"
output is set, then the
set value inclination is
restricted.


meter
assign-
ment
screen
form
123.4 QSP_HLM BOOL High limit of setpoint FALSE The setpoint is always -
reached limited to a high and a
low limit. The output
"Upper limit of setpoint
value triggered"
indicates that the upper
limit has been
exceeded.
123.5 QSP_LLM BOOL Low limit of setpoint FALSE The setpoint is always -
reached limited to a high and a
of set value reached"
output displays the
falling short of the low
limit.
123.6 QSPOPON BOOL Setpoint operation FALSE The output "set value -
on operation on" indicates
whether the set value is
being operated by the
configuration tool (circle
diagram). If the bit is
set, the value SP_OP is
used as the setpoint
value.
123.7 QLMNSAFE BOOL Safety operation FALSE If the output "Safety -
mode" is set, the safety
output as the
manipulated value.
124.0 QLMNOPON BOOL Manipulated value FALSE The output -
operation on "Manipulated value
operation on" indicates
whether the
being operated via the
configuration tool (loop
display). If the bit is set,
the value LMN_OP is
used as the
manipulated value.
124.1 QLMNTRK BOOL Follow-up operation FALSE The output "Follow-up -
mode" indicates
whether the
tracked via an analog
input.


meter
assign-
ment
screen
form
124.2 QLMN_RE BOOL Manual = 1 FALSE The output "Manual = -
Automatic = 0 1; Automatic = =0"
indicates whether the
set to the external
manipulated value
LMN_RE (Manual = 0)
or not.
124.3 QLMNR_HS BOOL High limit signal of FALSE The output "Upper end -
repeated stop signal of position
manipulated value feedback" indicates
whether the control
limit.
QLMNR_HS = TRUE
means: The control
limit.
only)
124.4 QLMNR_LS BOOL Low limit signal of FALSE The output "Lower end -
repeated stop signal of position
manipulated value feedback" indicates
whether the control
limit.
QLMNR_LS = TRUE
means: The control
limit.
only)
124.5 QLMNR_ON BOOL Repeated FALSE The output "position -
manipulated value feedback on" shows
on the set mode "step
controller with position
feedback" or "step
controller without
position feedback".
124.6 QFUZZY BOOL PID algorithm = 0 FALSE If the output "PID -
fuzzy = 1 algorithm = 0,
Fuzzy = 1" is set, the
controller operates with
the fuzzy algorithm.


meter
assign-
ment
screen
form
124.7 QSPLEPV BOOL Fuzzy display: FALSE The output "Display of -
Setpoint < process FUZZY controller: set
variable value < actual value" is
set when the fuzzy
on, if the set value is
less than the effective
actual value.
125.0 QSPR BOOL Split-range FALSE If the output "Split- -
operation range operation" is set,
the continuous
controller is operating
in split-range mode.
125.1 QLMNUP BOOL Manipulated signal FALSE Is the output -
up "Manipulated value
signal up".
125.2 QLMNDN BOOL Manipulated signal FALSE Is the output -
down "Manipulated value
signal down".
125.4 QBACKUP BOOL backup FALSE 0= No backup state -
(CPU in RUN)
1= Backup state (CPU
in STOP or failed)
125.5 QID BOOL Identification in work FALSE QID = TRUE shows -
that an identification is
running (not that it is
switched on). After the
end of the identification
the identification result
can be read off from
the parameters
IDSTATUS of the FB
CH_DIAG.


meter
assign-
ment
screen
form
125.6 QMAN_FC BOOL Manual mode or FALSE The controller is a -
anti-reset-windup by master controller which
follower controller is tracked by manual
operation of a
secondary controller is
tracked to its process
variable or whose
integral component is
halted because the
setpoint value or
manipulated variable of
the secondary
controller is in the
limitation.
126.0 RET_VALU INT Return value 0 RET_VALU includes -
SFC 58/59. With the
block for PROFINET
Mode, the RET_VAL
3rd bytes from the
STATUS parameter of
the SFB 52/53.
RET_VALU can be
reported via the
QMOD_F (see

In/Out Parameters
Table 11-18 I/O parameters of the DBs for operator control and monitoring
Address Parameter Data Comment Permitted range of Default Explanation In the

assign-
ment
screen
form
128.0 SP_INT REAL Internal setpoint Technical range of 0.0 The through -
values parameter "internal set
(physical variable) value" serves to
specify a set value by
means of operating
and monitoring
functions.
132.0 SP_OP REAL Setpoint Technical range of 0.0 The configuration tool -
2) operation values (loop display) has
(physical variable) access to the through
parameter "Setpoint
SP_OP_ON is set, the
value "Setpoint
operation" is used as
the setpoint value.
136.0 LMN_OP REAL Manipulated -100.0...100.0 (%) 0.0 The configuration tool -
2) value operation (loop display) has
access to the through
parameter
LMNOP_ON is set, the
value "Manipulated
value operation" is
used as the
manipulated value.
140.0 SP_OP_ON BOOL Setpoint FALSE The configuration tool -
2) operation on (circle diagram) has
access to the through
parameter "Set value
operation on". If the bit
is set, the value
setpoint value.
140.1 LMNOP_ON BOOL Manipulated FALSE The configuration tool -
2) value operation (circle diagram) has
on access to the through
parameter
operation on". If the bit
is set, the value
LMN_OP is used as
the manipulated value.

Address Parameter Data Comment Permitted range of Default Explanation In the

assign-
ment
screen
form
140.2 LOAD_PAR BOOL Load control FALSE If the through -
parameter to parameter "Load
FM 355/455 control parameter to
FM 355/455" is set,
the control parameters
are loaded into the
module and the
through parameter is
reset.
140.3 LOAD_OP BOOL Load operator FALSE If the through -
parameter to parameter "Load
FM 355/455 operator parameter to
FM 355/455" is set,
the operating
parameters are loaded
into the module and
the through parameter
is reset.
1) Control parameters
Control parameters are downloaded to the module if the in/out parameter LOAD_PAR is set. All the control parameters are
loaded permanently to the EEPROM of the FM 355.
2) Operating parameters
Operating parameters are downloaded to the module if the in/out parameter LOAD_OP is set.
See also
Error display from the group error LED (Page 12-1)

Faults and Diagnostics 12
12.1 12.1 Error display from the group error LED
When does the group error LED light up?

If the red group error LED lights up, there is either an error on the module (internal error) or
in the line connections (external error).
If the yellow LED flashes, then the firmware has been deleted. This status can only occur in
the case of faulty hardware or if the loading procedure of the firmware is aborted.
Which errors are displayed?

The following errors are displayed by the group error LED lighting up:
Type of Diagnostic message Possible cause Correction

error
Internal Module defective Hardware error Replace the module
errors
Time watchdog tripped Hardware error Replace the module
EEPROM content is Failure of the supply voltage Reconfigure module
invalid when configuring
External Incorrect parameters in Incorrect parameters have been Reconfigure module
errors module transferred to the module
Errors with the analog Analog input hardware error Replace the module
inputs or analog outputs Analog input wire break Remedy wire break
Analog input measuring range Check measuring signal
violation (underrange)
Analog input measuring range Check measuring signal
violation (overrange)
Analog output wire break Remedy wire break
Analog output short circuit Eliminate short circuit
Missing external auxiliary 24 V supply missing Restore 24 V supply
supply
Diagnostic interrupt in the case of errors

All errors can trigger a diagnostic interrupt if you have enabled the diagnostic interrupt in the
respective parameterization screen. From the diagnostic data records DS0 and DS1 you can
see which errors have caused the LED to light up. The assignment of the diagnostic data
records DS0 and DS1 is described in the next section.

12.2 Triggering diagnostic interrupts
12.2 12.2 Triggering diagnostic interrupts
What is a diagnostic interrupt?

If the user program reacts to an internal or external error, you can configure a diagnostic
interrupt that interrupts the cyclic program of the CPU and calls the diagnostic interrupt OB,
OB 82.
Which events can trigger a diagnostic interrupt?

The list shows which events can trigger a diagnostic interrupt:
• The module has not been configured or is incorrectly configured
• Module defective
• Wire break with analog inputs (only 4 to 20 mA)
• Overflow and underflow with analog inputs
• Load break and short circuit with analog outputs
Default setting
The diagnostic interrupt is blocked by default.
Enabling the diagnostic interrupt

In the "Basic parameters" screen you can block or enable the diagnostic interrupt for the
module.
Responses to an interrupt-triggering event

The following happens when an event occurs that could trigger a diagnostic interrupt:
• The diagnostic information is stored in the diagnostic records DS0 and DS1 on the
module.
• The group error LED lights up.
• The diagnostic interrupt OB (OB 82) is called.
• The diagnostic record DS0 is entered in the start information of the diagnostic interrupt
OB.
• If there is no hardware fault, the module continues to control.
If no OB 82 is programmed, the CPU goes to STOP.
Diagnostic data record DS0 and DS1

The information as to which event has triggered a diagnostic interrupt is stored in the
diagnostic data records DS0 and DS1. The diagnostic data record DS0 contains four bytes,
the DS1 16 bytes, whereby the first four bytes are identical to those of the DS0.

Reading the Record from the Module

Diagnostic data record DS0 is automatically transferred to the start information when the
diagnostic OBs are called. There these four bytes are stored in the local data (byte 8 - 11) of
the OB 82.
The diagnostic data record DS1 (and hence also the content of the DS0) can be read from
the module by means of SFC 59 "RD_REC" or SFB 52 "RDREC". It only makes sense to do
this, if a fault in a channel is signaled in DS0.
The SFC 59 or SFB 52 must be called in the same OB as the FB PID_FM. This is achieved
by the following measure: Set a bit while the OB 82 is being executed. Query this bit in the
OB, in which the FB PID_FM is also called, and then, with a set bit call the SFC 59 or
SFB 52.
How Does the Diagnostics Text Appear in the Diagnostics Buffer?

If you want to enter the diagnostics message in the diagnostics buffer, you must call the
SFC 52 "Enter user-specific message in diagnostics buffer" in the user program. The event
number of the respective diagnostics message is specified in the input parameter EVENTN.
The interrupt is entered in the diagnostics buffer with x=1 as incoming and with x=0 as
outgoing. The diagnostics buffer contains the relevant diagnostics text in the "Meaning"
column as well as the time of the entry.
Assignments of the Diagnostics Record DS0 in the Start Information

The following table shows the assignments of the diagnostics record DS0 in the start
information. All unlisted bits are not significant and are set to zero.
Table 12-1 Assignments of diagnostics record DS0
Byte Bit Meaning Note Event No.

0 0 Module malfunction Is set at every diagnostics event 8:x:00
1 Internal fault Is set at all internal faults: 8:x:01
• Watchdog time-out
• EEPROM contents invalid. Module starts
up without controlling and waits for
renewed parameter configuration by the
CPU.
• EPROM error
• ADC/DAC fault
• Analog input, hardware fault
2 External error Is set at all external errors: 8:x:02
• Missing external auxiliary supply
• Parameter configuration faulty
• Analog input, wire breakage (only range 4
to 20 mA)
• Analog input, measuring range violation
(underrange)
• Analog input, measuring range violation
(overrange)
• Analog output, wire breakage
• Analog output, short circuit


3 Fault in a channel See DS1, from byte 7, for further breakdown 8:x:03
4 Missing external 24 V power supply of the FM 355 failed 8:x:04
auxiliary supply
6 EEPROM contents Failure of the supply voltage during a writing 8:x:03
invalid process to the EEPROM. The module starts
up with default parameters.
7 Parameter The module cannot use a parameter. Reason: 8:x:07
configuration faulty Parameter unknown or impermissible
combination of parameters.
Refer to the menu PLC > Parameter
Assignment Error
1 0 ... 3 Module class Always has 8 assigned –
4 Channel-specific Is set if the module can supply additional –
diagnostics channel information and if a channel error
exists (refer to DS 1 Byte 7 to 12)
2 3 Watchdog time-out Hardware fault 8:x:33
3 2 EPROM error Module defective 8:x:42
4 ADC/DAC fault Module defective 8:x:44
Assignments of Diagnostics Record DS1

The diagnostics record DS1 consists of 16 bytes. The first 4 bytes are identical with
diagnostics record DS0. The following table shows the assignment of the remaining bytes.
All unlisted bits are not significant and are set to zero.
Table 12-2 Assignment of Bytes 4 to 12 of the diagnostics record DS1

4 0 ... 7 Channel type Always has 75H assigned –
5 0 ... 7 Length of the diagnostic Always has 8 assigned –
information
6 0 ... 7 Number of channels Always has 5 assigned (4 controllers –
+ 1 reference channel)
7 0 ... 7 Channel error vector One bit is assigned to each channel –
8 0 Analog input, hardware fault Channel-specific 8:x:B0
1 Unused diagnostics 8:x:B1
channel 1
2 Analog input wire break (only 8:x:B2
area 4 to 20 mA)
3 Unused 8:x:B3
4 Analog input below 8:x:B4
measuring range
5 Analog input, measuring 8:x:B5
range violation (overrange)
6 Analog output, wire breakage Only with the 8:x:B6
current output of
the C controller


7 Analog output, short circuit Only with the 8:x:B7
voltage output of
the C controller
9 0 ... 7 See Byte 8 Channel-specific diagnostics channel See above
2
3
4
12 0 ... 5 See Byte 8 Diagnostics for reference channel See above

12.3 Measuring transformer error
12.3 12.3 Measuring transformer error
Faults at Measuring Transducers

The following measuring transducer faults can be recognized by the controller module:
• Measuring range violation (underrange)
• Measuring range violation (overrange)
• Wiring breakage (not at all measuring ranges)
If one of these faults occurs, the group error bit "External error" is set in the diagnostics
record DS0 and the channel-specific error bits in the diagnostics record DS1 (refer to the
tables in the previous section). When these faults disappear, the corresponding bits are
reset.
The following table shows at which limits in the individual measuring ranges the error bits are
set and reset:
Measuring range Error bit measuring range Error bit measuring range Error bit wire breakage
violation (underrange) at ... violation (overrange) at ... indication
DS1: Byte 10 to 26, Bit 4 DS1: Byte 10 to 26, Bit 5 DS1: Byte 10 to 26, Bit 2
0 to 20 mA < –3.5 mA > 23.5 mA –
4 to 20 mA Error bit = 1 at < 3.6 mA > 22.8 mA Error bit = 1 at < 3.6 mA
Error bit = 0 at < 3.8 mA Error bit = 0 at < 3.8 mA
0 V to 10 V <–1.175 V > 11.75 V –
Pt 100 < 30.82 mV > 650.46 mV –
(–200 to 850°C)
(–328 to 1562°F)
Pt 100 < 30.82 mV > 499.06 mV –
(–200 to 556°C)
(–328 to 1032°F)
Pt 100 < 30.82 mV > 254.12 mV –
(–200 to 130°C)
(–328 to 264°F)
Thermocouple Type B < 0 mV > 13.81 mV –
Thermocouple Type J < –8.1 mV > 69.54 mV –
Thermocouple Type K < –6.45 mV > 54.88 mV –
Thermocouple Type R < –0.23 mV > 21.11 mV –
Thermocouple Type S < –0.24 mV > 18.7 mV –
Free thermocouple < Lower input value of the < Upper input value of the –
polyline polyline

Examples 13
13.1 13.1 Application example for the FM 355 S
Introduction
The FM_PIDEx project contains the example "SIMATIC 300 Station1 (S)" that shows you the
operation of the controller module S at a system simulated in the CPU. This means that you
can test the module without a real process.
Prerequisites
Requirements for working with the example program:
• CPU 314 is inserted at Slot 2
• FM 355 S is plugged into slot 4
• CPU and FM 355 S are supplied with voltage
• There is an online connection PG / PC to the CPU
If you wish to work with a different CPU or FM 355, you must adapt the example under
Configure hardware.
Load the sample program

To install the program, proceed as follows:
1. Download the user program blocks from example 355 S to the CPU.
2. In "HW Config: configure hardware", launch the parameterization screen of the FM 355.
3. Use the Test > ...> Open instance DB menu item to open the DB 31.
You can now work with the loop display, the curve recorder and the controller optimization.

Examples
13.1 Application example for the FM 355 S
Application of the Example Program

The example (Example 355 S) includes a step controller in conjunction with a simulated
control section that comprises a 3rd arrangement delay element (PT3).
The example program can be used to create a step controller without any difficulty and to
configure and test it in all its properties in an offline interaction with a typical system
arrangement.
The example program makes it easy to understand the functionality and configuration of
controllers with discontinuous output, such as they are very often used to control systems
with motor-controlled actuators. It can therefore also be used for familiarizing and training.
You approximate the controlled system to the properties of the real process by selecting the
parameters correspondingly. The configuration tool can be used to find a set of suitable
controller characteristics through identification of the model system.
Functions of the Example Program

The example Example 355 S essentially comprises the two function blocks PID_FM (FB 31)
and PROC_S (FB 100). PID_FM embodies the step controller while PROC_S simulates a
controlled system with the function elements "Valve" and PT3 (refer to the figure below).
Information about the position of the actuator and, if appropriate, stop signals that have been
reached are transferred to the machine in addition to the controlled variable.
',69
6HWSRLQW 6WHSDFWLRQ
FRQWUROOHU
$FWXDOYDOXH
$FWXDWRU 37
6WRSVLJQDOV
3RVLWLRQIHHGEDFN
&RQWUROOHU &RQWUROOHGV\VWHP
Figure 13-1 Example Example 355 S, control circuit
The PROC_S function block simulates a series connection that consists of the integrating
actuator and three first-order time delays (refer to the following figure). The disturbance
variable DISV is always added to the output signal of the actuator so that system
disturbances can be fed forward manually at this point. The static system gain can be
determined by means of the GAIN factor.

Examples
The parameter for the motor actuating time MTR_TM defines the time that the actuator
requires to pass from end stop to end stop.
4/015B+6
4/015B/6
',69 *$,1
,19B83 2879
;
,19B'2:1
075B70 /015B+/0 70B/$* 70B/$* 70B/$*

/015B//0
Figure 13-2 Structure and parameters of the controlled system block PROC_S
Block Structure
Example 1 consists of the function APP_1, that encompasses the blocks for the controller
and the simulated controlled system, as well as of the call blocks for restarting (OB 100) and
a watchdog interrupt level (OB 35 with 100 ms cycle) .
Table 13-1 Blocks of Example 1
Block Name Description

(in the toolbar)
OB 100 Restart OB
OB 35 Time-controlled OB: 100 ms
FC100 APP_1 Example 1
FC101 SIM_355 Process value transfer in the controller module S
FB 31 PID_FM Step controller in the controller module S
FB 100 PROC_S Controlled system for step controller
DB 100 PROCESS Instance DB for PROC_S
DB 31 DB_PID_FM Instance DB for PID_FM

Examples
Parameters of the Model Controlled System for Step Controller

The following figure shows the function scheme and the parameters of the controlled system.
,QSXWSDUDPHWHUV 2XWSXWSDUDPHWHUV
352&B6)%
3DUDPHWHU 7\SH 6LJQDO 7\SH
&20B567 %22/ )$/6(b
&<&/( 7,0( 7V
*$,1 5($/
',69 5($/
,19B83 %22/ )$/6(b 4/015B+6 %22/ )$/6(b
,19B'2:1 %22/ )$/6(b 2879 5($/
4/015B/6 %22/ )$/6(b

/015 5($/

/015B+/0 5($/
/015B//0 5($/
075B70 7,0( 7V
70B/$* 7,0( 7V
70B/$* 7,0( 7V
70B/$* 7,0( 7V
Figure 13-3 Function scheme and parameters of the system model PROC_S
* Default setting when the instance DB is created
Parameters and Step Response

The reaction of a control loop with simulated PT 3rd-order controlled system is shown by
means of a concrete parameter configuration of the step controller with PI-action and
activated dead band. The set system parameters with 10 s delay time each approximately
simulate the behavior of a rapid temperature process or a filling level control system.
Setting one of the delay times to TM_LAGx = 0 s reduces the order of the system by one
degree.

Examples
The curve diagram (configuration tool) shows the dynamic and transient response of the
closed loop circuit after a setpoint value change of 60 percent (refer to the figure below). The
table contains the currently set values of the relevant parameters for controller and controlled
system.
Parameter Type Parameterization Description

Controller:
GAIN REAL 0.31 P-action coefficient
TI TIME 19.190 s Integration time
MTR_TM TIME 20 s Motor actuating time
PULSE_TM TIME 100 ms Minimum pulse time
BREAK_TM TIME 100 ms Minimum break time
DEADB_ON BOOL TRUE Dead Band On
DEADB_W REAL 0.5 Dead band width
Controlled system
CYCLE TIME 100 ms Sampling time
GAIN REAL 1.5 Servo gain
MTR_TM TIME 20 s Motor actuating time
TM_LAG1 TIME 10 s Time lag 1
Step Response

6HWSRLQW
$FWXDOYDOXH

3RVLWLRQ
IHHGEDFN

Figure 13-4 Control loop with step controller after setpoint step change

Examples
13.2 Application example for the FM 355 C
13.2 13.2 Application example for the FM 355 C
Introduction
The project FM_PIDEx can be found in the example "SIMATIC 300 Station2 (C)", and it
enables you to operate the FM 355 C in a section that is simulated in the CPU. This means
that you can test the module without a real process.
Prerequisites
Requirements for working with the example program:
• FM 355 C is plugged into slot 4
• CPU and FM 355 C are supplied with voltage
• There is an online connection PG / PC to the CPU
If you wish to work with a different CPU or FM 355, you must adapt the example under
Configure hardware.
Load the sample program

To install the program, proceed as follows:
1. Download the user program blocks from example 355 C to the CPU.
2. In "HW Config: configure hardware", launch the parameterization screen of the FM 355.
3. Use the Test > ...> Open instance DB menu item to open the DB 31.
You can now work with the loop display, the curve recorder and the controller optimization.

The example (Example 355 C) includes a continuous controller in conjunction with a
simulated control section that comprises a 3rd arrangement delay element (PT3).
The example program can be used to generate a PID controller without any difficulty and to
configure and test it in all its properties in an offline interaction with a typical system
arrangement.
The example program makes it easy to understand the functionality and configuration of
controllers with an analog output signal, such as they are very often used to control systems
with actuators that act proportionally. It can therefore also be used for familiarizing and
training.
You approximate the controlled system to the properties of the real process by selecting the
parameters correspondingly. The configuration tool can be used to find a set of suitable
controller characteristics through identification of the model system.

Examples
Functions of the Example Program

The example Example 355 C essentially comprises the two function blocks PID_FM (FB 31)
and PROC_C (FB 100). PID_FM embodies the controller while PROC_C simulates a
controlled system with a third-order regulation (refer to the figure below).
',69
&3 &RQWLQXRXV /01

FRQWUROOHU
39 ದ
37
&RQWUROOHU &RQWUROOHGV\VWHP
Figure 13-5 Example Example 355 C, control circuit
The PROC_C function block simulates a series connection that consists of three first-order
time delays (refer to the following figure). The disturbance variable DISV is always added to
the output signal of the actuator so that system disturbances can be fed forward manually at
this point. The static system gain can be determined by means of the GAIN factor.
',69 *$,1
,19 2879
;
70B/$* 70B/$* 70B/$*
Figure 13-6 Structure and parameters of the controlled system block PROC_C
Block structure
Example 2 consists of the function APP_2, that encompasses the blocks for the controller
and the simulated controlled system, as well as of the call blocks for restarting (OB 100) and
a watchdog interrupt level (OB 35 with 100 ms cycle).
Table 13-2 Blocks of Example 2
Block Name Description

(in the toolbar)
OB 100 Restart OB
OB 35 Time-controlled OB 100 ms
FC100 APP_2 Example 2
FC101 SIM_355 Process value transfer in the controller module C
FB 31 PID_FM Continuous-action controller in the controller module C
FB 100 PROC_C Controlled system for continuous-action controller
DB 100 PROCESS Instance DB for PROC_C
DB 31 DB_PID_FM Instance DB for PID_FM

Examples
Parameters of the Model Controlled System for Continuous-Action Controllers

The following figure shows the function scheme and the parameters of the controlled system.
,QSXWSDUDPHWHUV 2XWSXWSDUDPHWHUV
352&B&)%
3DUDPHWHU 7\SH 6LJQDO 7\SH
&20B567 %22/ )$/6(b
&<&/( 7,0( 7V
*$,1 5($/
',69 5($/

,19B'2:1 5($/ 2879 5($/

70B/$* 7,0( 7V

70B/$* 7,0( 7V
70B/$* 7,0( 7V
Figure 13-7 Function scheme and parameters of the system model PROC_C
*) Default setting when the instance DB is created
Parameters and Step Response

The reaction of a control loop with simulated PT 3rd-order controlled system is shown by
means of a concrete parameter configuration of the continuous-action controller with PID-
action. The set system parameters with 10 s delay time each approximately simulate the
behavior of a pressure control system or a filling level control system.
Setting one of the delay times to TM_LAGx = 0 s reduces the order of the system by one
degree.
The curve diagram (configuration tool) shows the dynamic and transient response of the
closed loop circuit after a series of setpoint changes of 20 percent each of the measuring
range (refer to the figure below). The table contains the currently set values of the relevant
parameters for controller and controlled system.
Parameter Type Parameterization Description

Controller:
GAIN REAL 1.535 P-action coefficient
TI TIME 22.720 s Integration time
TD TIME 5.974 s Derivative time
TM_LAG TIME 1.195 s D-action component delay time
Controlled system:
CYCLE TIME 100 ms Sampling time
GAIN REAL 1.5 Servo gain

Examples
Step Response

2XWSXW
YDULDEOH

6HWSRLQW

&RQWUROOHG
YDULDEOHV

Figure 13-8 Control system with continuous-action controller and setpoint step changes across the
entire measuring range

Examples
13.3 Application Example for Diagnostics
13.3 13.3 Application Example for Diagnostics
Introduction
The FM_PIDEx project contains the example "SIMATIC 300 Station3 (C)" that shows you the
application and the evaluation of the diagnostics in the DS1 of the controller module.
Prerequisites
Requirements for working with the example:
• FM 355 C is inserted at Slot 4
• CPU and FM 355 C are supplied with power
• Online connection programming device/PC to the CPU exists
If you want to use a different CPU or FM355, you have to adapt the example under the
hardware configuration section.
Note
Diagnostic interrupts are only triggered in the CPU if you select the following settings at the
"Basic parameters" tab in the "Properties - FM 355 C PID Control" window under HW Config
:
• Interrupt generation: Yes
• Interrupt selection: Diagnosis
Loading the Example Program

Download the Blocks user program with the system data to the CPU.

If a diagnostics interrupt occurs, the DIAG_ON parameter of the FB1 FM_DIAG_355 is set in
the OB 82. The FM_DIAG_355 is called in the OB 35. It reads the diagnostics record DS1 of
the module.
See also
Triggering diagnostic interrupts (Page 12-2)

Examples
13.4 Interconnection example for a cascade control
13.4 13.4 Interconnection example for a cascade control
Double loop cascade control

The following figure shows a double loop cascade control:
&RQWUROOHU /01 &RQWUROOHU /01

6HFWLRQದ 6HFWLRQದ
SXOVH VWHS /01'1 SDUW SDUW
FRQWUROOHU DFWLRQ
FRQWUROOHU
Figure 13-9 Double loop cascade control
You realize this controller interconnection with a controller module S, whereby you configure
a pulse controller as the main controller and select the manipulated value of the main
controller on the set value input.
You can also realize a controller cascade by means of a controller module C. The main
controller is then not a pulse controller and the slave controller is not a step controller. The
interconnection must be realized identically.
In the slave controller, the manipulated value of the main controller is standardized from the
value range 0 to 100% to the value range of the actual value A and is then further processed
as the set value.
0DQLSXODWHG 3UHSDULQJWKHVHWSRLQW
YDULDEOH/01RI
WKHPDVWHU
FRQWUROOHU
5DPS /LPLWLQJ SRLQW
6ZLWFKLQJ
VDIHW\VHW
SRLQW (UURU
VLJQDO
$ODUP
SURFHVV
YDOXH
'LQSXW
'LVWXUEDQFHYDULDEOH
Figure 13-10 Realizing the cascade control with the controller module

Examples
13.5 Interconnection example for a ratio control
13.5 13.5 Interconnection example for a ratio control
Ratio controlling with two control circuits

The following figure shows a ratio control with two control circuits:
63b /01
&RQWUROOHU 3URFHVV
39
)$&
;
63b
/01 3URFHVV
&RQWUROOHU
39
Figure 13-11 Ratio controlling with two control circuits
The controller 1 is configured as the fixed set point controller. Controller 2 is configured as a
ratio / mixed controller. The following figure explains its interconnection.
The ratio factor FAC is specified by the set value input of the FB PID_FM (SP_RE or
SP_OP).
3UHSDULQJWKHVHWSRLQW 0XOWLSOLFDWLRQ
)$&
5DPS /LPLWLQJ SRLQW
6ZLWFKLQJ
VDIHW\VHW
3URFHVVYDOXH SRLQW (UURU
39 VLJQDO
$FWXDOYDOXH'
3URFHVVYDOXH
39 $ODUP
SURFHVV
YDOXH
'LQSXW
'LVWXUEDQFHYDULDEOH
Figure 13-12 Realizing the ratio control with the controller module

Examples
13.6 Interconnection example for a mixed control
13.6 13.6 Interconnection example for a mixed control
Mixed controllers for three components

The following figure shows a mixed control for three components:
7RWDOTXDQWLW\ 0DLQFRPSRQHQWV
63RUKLJKHU
&3 &RQWUROOHU /01 &RQWUROOHU 4/0183 39
ದ SXOVH ; ದ VWHSDFWLRQ 4/01'1 3URFHVV
FRQWUROOHU FRQWUROOHU
39
)$&
63 &RQWUROOHU 4/0183 39

; ದ VWHSDFWLRQ 4/01'1 3URFHVV ;
FRQWUROOHU
)$& )$&
63 &RQWUROOHU 4/0183 39

; ದ VWHSDFWLRQ 4/01'1 3URFHVV ;
FRQWUROOHU
)$& )$&
Figure 13-13 Mixed controllers for three components
The main controller is configured as a three-component controller and pulse controller. The
controllers 1, 2 and 3 are configured as ratio / mixed controllers. The interconnection for the
main controller is shown in the following figure.

Examples
You can configure the mixing factors for the components PV2 and PV3 via the "add up"
button. If you have to change these factors during runtime, it is possible to do this via the FB
PID_PAR.
6HWSRLQW
(IIHFWLYHVHW
6ZLWFKLQJ 5DPS /LPLWLQJ SRLQW
VDIHW\VHW
SRLQW (UURU
VLJQDO
7RWDOL]LQJ
)DFWRUIRUSURFHVVYDOXH%
3URFHVVYDOXH )DFWRUIRUSURFHVVYDOXH&
39 2IIVHW $ODUP
3URFHVVYDOXH (IIHFWLYH
3URFHVVYDOXH
$ SURFHVV
39
YDOXH
3URFHVVYDOXH%
3URFHVVYDOXH
39
3URFHVVYDOXH& 'LQSXW
'LVWXUEDQFHYDULDEOH
Figure 13-14 Realizing the total amount controller (main controller)
The slave controllers are configured as ratio / mixed controllers. The example of the
component PV1 in the figure below shows their interconnection. The mixing factor FAC is
specified by the set value input of the FB PID_FM (SP_RE or SP_OP).

Examples
In the slave controller (mixed controller), the manipulated variable of the main controller is
standardized from the value range 0 to 100% to the value range of the actual value A and is
then further processed as the set value D.
3UHSDULQJWKHVHWSRLQW 0XOWLSO\LQJ
)$&
6HWSRLQW
(IIHFWLYHVHW
6ZLWFKLQJ 5DPS /LPLWLQJ1RUPDOL] SRLQW
0DQLSXODWHG
VDIHW\VHW LQJ
YDULDEOH/01RI (UURU
SRLQW
WKHPDVWHU VLJQDO
FRQWUROOHU
3URFHVVYDOXH$
3URFHVVYDOXH
$ODUP
39
3URFHVVYDOXH% (IIHFWLYH
SURFHVV
YDOXH
'LQSXW
'LVWXUEDQFHYDULDEOH
Figure 13-15 Realizing the component controller (slave controller)
See also

Examples

A FB 29 and FB 30 A
A.1 A.1 The FB 29 "PID_PAR" function block
Use
FB 29 "PID_PAR” is used for online modification of parameters that cannot be specified
through FB PID_FM.
The block uses SFC 102 and can therefore only be deployed in the new S7-300 CPU with
MMC.
Creating and supplying power to the instance DB

Before you program the module with the user program, you need to create an instance DB
for each controller channel you wish to use and supply them with the required data.
1. In STEP 7, create the instance DBs as data blocks with an assigned FB "PID_PAR”
function block.
2. For each instance DB enter the module address in the MOD_ADDR parameter. The
module address of the FM 355 is determined by the configuration of your hardware. Take
the start address from HW Config.
3. Enter the channel number of the corresponding controller channel (1, 2, 3 or 4) in the
CHANNEL parameter for each instance DB.
4. Store the instance DBs.
You can also supply the values of MOD_ADDR and CHANNEL when you call up the block.
Start and Initialization

FB 29 "PID_PAR” must be started in the same watchdog OB as all other FBs that access the
same FM 355.
FB 29 "PID_PAR" requires an initialization run. it is automatically triggered if the system data
(SDB default data of the FM 355) has not yet been read from the FB29 "PID_PAR". You can
also start the initialization yourself with COM_RST=TRUE, which is usually done in OB100
since the system data is sent to the FM 355 after STOP-RUN of the CPU. The initialization
process lasts several cycles. No data is sent to the FM 355 via SFC 58 during the
initialization (COM_RST=TRUE). The block automatically resets the COM_RST parameter
after the initialization.
When the FM 355 is used in distributed I/O, it may take several start cycles for the
parameters to be completely sent to the FM 355 via SFC 58. The BUSY parameter has the
value TRUE as long as the transmission is ongoing. To change the parameters, you should
call the block repeatedly over several cycles until BUSY = FALSE and RET_VALU = 0.

Operating Instructions, Edition 02/2006, A5E00059344-03 A-1
FB 29 and FB 30
A.1 The FB 29 "PID_PAR" function block
To conserve system resources and time, FB 29 "PID_PAR” should be called only when
parameters are to be changed and not in every cycle.
Description
FB 29 "PID_PAR” can be used to change one of the REAL parameters and one of the INT
parameters listed in the following table each time it is called.
The assignment of the specified value to the parameter is carried out via the index numbers
listed in the table, which you can specify in the INDEX_R or INDEX_I parameter in the
instance DB of "FB PID_PAR”.
If the input COM_RST = TRUE, the FB reads the parameters from the system data and
saves them in static variables. The parameters to be changed are overwritten there and the
complete record is then transferred to the FM 355. Since the FB has its own data retention
for the parameters in its static variables, additional parameters can also be changed without
initialization. To this purpose you must call up the same instance DB several times
consecutively with different index numbers. Take into consideration the maximum number
write and read requests by SFC 58/59 in the respective CPU.
The output parameter RET_VALU contains the RET_VAL of SFC102 during the initialization.
The RET_VAL of SFC 58 is displayed when writing to the FM 355. The values of RET_VAL
are described in the reference manual /2/. If the INDEX_R or INDEX_I parameter is outside
the allowed range, RET_VALU = W#16#80FF is output. If the CHANNEL parameter is
outside its allowed range, RET_VALU = W#16#80B0 is output.
Note
Note that the parameters you change by using FB 29 "PID_PAR” are overwritten by the
parameters of the system data when the CPU starts up.
Example
During operation you want to modify the start-up time of the ramp for the reference variable
and, depending on the process state, use different analog input values as the process value.
• Set the COM_RST parameter as TRUE in the instance DB in the CPU startup (OB 100).
• To configure the ramp-up time of the ramp for the reference variable to 10.0, call the
block with INDEX_R = 30, VALUE_R = 10.0. In the same call, you can also configure
analog input value 4 of the module as the process value. Call the block INDEX_I = 50 and
VALUE_I = 4 to do this.
• Call the block over several cycles until BUSY = FALSE, RET_VALU = 0 and COM_RST =
FALSE.

A-2 Operating Instructions, Edition 02/2006, A5E00059344-03
FB 29 and FB 30
Modifiable Parameters
Table A-1 List of the REAL and INT parameters that can be changed with the "PID_PAR" FB

- No parameter selected 0
REAL Filter time constant for the analog input 1
REAL Measurement end (100%) 2
REAL Measurement start (0%) 3
REAL Polyline, interpolation point 1 input side 4
REAL Polyline, interpolation point 10 input 13
side
side
side
side
REAL Polyline, interpolation point 1 output 17
side
side
side
side
side
side
side
side
side
side
side

FB 29 and FB 30

side
side
REAL Start-up time of the ramp for the 30
reference variable
REAL Safety reference variable or safety 31
reference variable response
REAL Offset for setpoint link (ratio/mixing 32
controller)
REAL Factor for process value B (three 33
component controller)
REAL Factor for process value C (three 34
REAL Offset for process value link (three 35
REAL Factor for disturbance variable link 36
REAL Operating point 37
REAL Aggressivity at fuzzy controller 38
REAL Vertices for split range function: Start of 39
input signal A range
REAL Vertices for split range function: End of 40
input signal A range
output signal A range
output signal A range
input signal B range
input signal B range
output signal B range
output signal B range
INT Choice of reference variable SP or 49
SP_RE for the controller
0: Setpoint SP_RE of the function block
17 to 20: Manipulated variable (LMN) of
controllers 1 to 4
INT Selection of the main control variable 50
process value A for the controller
0: Process value A = 0.0

FB 29 and FB 30

INT Selection of the auxiliary control 51
variable process value B for the
controller
0: Process value B = 0.0
variable process value C for the
controller
0: Process value C = 0.0
variable process value C for the
controller
0: Process value D = 0.0
17 to 20: Manipulated variable (LMN) of
controllers 1 to 4
INT Selection of the DISV disturbance 54
variable for the controller
0: Disturbance variable = 0.0
INT Selection of the position tracking 55
TRACK_PER for the controller
INT Selection of the position tracking 56
LMNR_PER for the controller
INT Selection of the signal for switching to 57
the safety value for the manipulated
varaible of the controller
0: Selected only via SAFE_ON
parameter of FB PID_FM
1 to 8: Selection via SAFE_ON
parameter of FB PID_FM ORed with
digital input 1 to 8
INT Selecting the signal for switching over 58
to tracking function of the manipulated
variable of the controller
0: Selected only via LMNTRKON
1 to 8: Selection via LMNTRKON

FB 29 and FB 30

INT Selecting the signal for switching over 59
the manipulated variable of the
controller to LMN_RE
0: Selected only via LMN_REON
1 to 8: Selection via LMN_REON
INT Selection of the upper stop signal of the 60
position feedback
0: Selected only via LMNRHSRE
1 to 8: Selection via LMNRHSRE
INT Selection of the lower stop signal of the 61
position feedback
0: Selected only via LMNRLSRE
1 to 8: Selection via LMNRLSRE

FB 29 and FB 30
A.2 Instance DB of the FB 29
A.2 A.2 Instance DB of the FB 29
Introduction
The parameters of the instance DB are listed in the following tables:
• Through parameters
Input parameters
Table A-2 Input parameters of the instance DB for the FB 29 "'PID_PAR"
Address Parameter Data type Comment Permitted Default Explanation In the

English range of setting parameter
values assignment
screen form
0.0 MOD_ADDR INT FM 355 256 The module address -
module that resulted from the
address configuration with
FM 355 STEP 7 is given at this
module input.
address
2.0 CHANNEL INT Channel 1 to 4 1 The number of the -
number 1 to 4 controller channel to
Channel which the instance DB
number 1..4 is referenced is
configured at input
"Channel number".
4.0 INDEX_R INT Index for 0 to 48 0.0 Refer to the section -
REAL "The PID_PAR
Index for
REAL
parameter
6.0 VALUE_R REAL value for depending 0.0 Refer to the section -
REAL on "The PID_PAR
parameter respective Function Block"
value for parameter
REAL
parameter
10.0 INDEX_I INT Index for INT 0. 49 to 61 0.0 Refer to the section -
Index for INT Function Block"
parameter
12.0 VALUE_I INT Value for INT depending 0.0 Refer to the section -
parameter on "The PID_PAR
Value for INT respective Function Block"
parameter parameter

FB 29 and FB 30
Output parameters
Table A-3 Input parameters of the instance DB for the FB 29 "'PID_PAR"

values assignme
nt screen
form
14.0 RET_VALU WORD Return value of 0 RET_VALU contains -
SFC 58 and SFC the return value
102 RET_VAL of the
Return value of SFC58 for
SFC 58 and SFC COM_RST=FALSE
102 and SFC 102 for
COM_RST=TRUE..
RET_VALU=W#16#8
0FF if INDEX_R or
INDEX_I are not
within permitted
value range.
RET_VALU=W#16#8
0B0 if CHANNEL is
not within permitted
value range.
16.0 BUSY BOOL BUSY value of FALSE BUSY contains the -
SFC 58 and SFC return value BUSY of
102 the SFC 58 for
BUSY display of the COM_RST=FALSE
SFC 58 and SFC and SFC 102 for
102 COM_RST=TRUE.
If BUSY = TRUE, the
parameters have not
yet been entered in
the module (for
distributed I/Os). FB
PID_PAR should
then be called again
in the next cycle
taking RET_VALU
into account.

FB 29 and FB 30
Through parameters
Table A-4 Through parameters of the instance DB for the FB 29 "'PID_PAR"
Address Parameter Data Comment Permitted Default Explanation In the para

type English range of setting meter
values assignment
screen
18.0 COM_RST BOOL read parameters TRUE If the parameter
from system data COM_RST = TRUE,
Read parameters the FB PID_PAR
from system data performs an
initialization. The
parameters are read
of the CPU and
saved in the
instance DB. The
block sets
COM_RST
automatically. The
user usually sets
COM_RST to TRUE
in OB100.

FB 29 and FB 30
A.3 The FB 30 "CJ_T_PAR" function block
A.3 A.3 The FB 30 "CJ_T_PAR" function block
Use
The FB 30 "CJ_T_PAR" is used for online modification of the configured reference junction
temperature. This is required when a temperature control system with several FM 355s with
thermoelement inputs is operated without connecting a Pt 100 to each FM 355.
If, for example, the reference junction temperature is measured with an FM 355 at an
extruder control system with more than four heating zones, this can be read out via
READ_355 FB at the CJ_TEMP parameter and configured at the other FM 355 units via the
FB 30 "CJ_T_PAR".
Creating and supplying power to the instance DB

Before you program the module with the user program, you need to create an instance DB
and supply it with the required data.
1. Use STEP 7 to create the instance DB as data blocks with an assigned FB 30
"CJ_T_PAR" function block.
2. Enter the module address in the MOD_ADDR parameter for the instance DB. The module
address of the FM 355 is determined by the configuration of your hardware. Take the
start address from HW Config.
The reference junction temperature can be specified via the CJ_T parameter.
The RET_VALU output value contains the return value RET_VAL of the SFC58 for
COM_RST=FALSE and SFC 102 for COM_RST=TRUE.
Start and Initialization

The FB 30 "CJ_T_PAR" must be called in the same OB as all the other FBs that access the
same FM 355.
The FB 30 "CJ_T_PAR" requires an initialization run. it is automatically triggered if the
system data (SDB default data of the FM 355) has not yet been read from the FB 30
"CJ_T_PAR". You can also start the initialization yourself with COM_RST=TRUE, which is
usually done in OB100 since the system data is sent to the FM 355 after STOP-RUN of the
CPU. The initialization process lasts several cycles. No data is sent to the FM 355 via SFC
58 during the initialization (COM_RST=TRUE). The block automatically resets the
COM_RST parameter after the initialization.

FB 29 and FB 30
A.3 The FB 30 "CJ_T_PAR" function block
The FB 30 "CJ_T_PAR" is usually called cyclically. When the FM 355 is used in distributed
I/O, it may take several start cycles for the parameters to be completely sent to the FM 355
via SFC 58. The BUSY parameter has the value TRUE as long as the transmission is
ongoing and RET_VALU is does not equal zero. Changes in the reference temperature are
not transmitted during this period. The internal sampling time of the FM 355 must also be
taken into consideration here.
Note
Note
Note that the reference junction temperature you change by using FB 30 "CJ_T_PAR” is
overwritten by the parameters of the system data when the CPU starts up.

FB 29 and FB 30
A.4 A.4 Instance DB of the FB 30
Introduction
The parameters of the instance DB are listed in the following tables:
• Through parameters
Input parameters
Table A-5 Input parameters of the instance DB for the FB 30 "CJ_T_PAR"

values assignment
screen form
module that resulted from the
address configuration with
input.
2.0 CJ_T REAL Cold junction depending 0.0 The reference junction -
temperature on sensor temperature can be
type specified via the CJ_T
parameter.

FB 29 and FB 30
Output parameters
Table A-6 Output parameters of the instance DB for the FB 30 "CJ_T_PAR"

values assignment
screen form
6.0 RET_VALU WORD return value 0 RET_VALU contains -
RET_VAL of the
SFC58 for
COM_RST=FALSE
and SFC 102 for
COM_RST=TRUE..
8.0 BUSY BOOL BUSY value FALSE BUSY contains the -
of SFC return value BUSY of
WR_REC the SFC 58 for
COM_RST=FALSE
and SFC 102 for
COM_RST=TRUE.
If BUSY = TRUE, the
parameters have not
yet been entered in
the module (for
FB PID_PAR should
then be called again in
the next cycle taking
RET_VALU into
account (with
distributed I/O). The
FB PID_PAR should
then be called again in
the next cycle.

FB 29 and FB 30
Through parameters
Table A-7 Through parameters of the instance DB for the FB 30 "CJ_T_PAR"

values assignment
screen form
10.0 COM_RST BOOL read - If the parameter -
parameters COM_RST = TRUE,
from system the FB PID_PAR
data performs an
initialization. The
parameters are read
in the instance DB.
The block sets
COM_RST
automatically.
COM_RST is usually
set to TRUE in OB100
by the user.

FB 29 and FB 30
A.5 List of RET_VALU messages
A.5 A.5 List of RET_VALU messages
RET_VALU messages
JOB_ERR JOB_ERR JOB_ERR Meaning

(Hex) (Dec) (Int)
7000 28672 -32624 First call with REQ=0: no data transmission active; BUSY has
the value 0.
7001 28673 -32624 First call with REQ=1: data transmission initiated; BUSY has
the value 1.
7002 28674 -32624 Interim call (REQ irrelevant). Data transmission already
active; BUSY has the value 1.
8090 32912 -32624 Specified logical base address invalid: There is no assignment
in the SDB1/SDB2x, or it is not a base address.
80A0 32928 -32608 Negative acknowledgment when reading from the module.
Module was removed during the read operation or the module
is defective.
80A1 32929 -32607 Negative acknowledgment when writing to the module.
Module was removed during the write operation or the module
is defective.
80A2 32930 -32606 DP protocol error at layer 2
80A3 32931 -32605 DP protocol error in user interface/user
80A4 32932 -32604 Communication bus error
80B1 32945 -32591 Incorrect length specification. FM_TYPE parameter in channel
DB not set correctly for the module in use.
80B2 32946 -32590 The configured slot is not being used.
80B3 32947 -32589 Actual module type is not match configured module type.
80C0 32960 -32576 Module data not ready for reading.
80C1 32961 -32575 Data of a write job of the same type have not yet been
processed by the module.
80C2 32962 -32574 The module is currently processing the maximum possible
number of jobs.
80C3 32963 -32573 Required resources (memory etc.) currently occupied.
80C4 32964 -32572 Communication error
80C5 32965 -32571 Distributed I/O not available.
80C6 32966 -32570 Priority class abort (restart or background).
8522 34082 -31454 Channel DB or parameter DB too short. The data cannot be
read off the DB. (Write job)
8532 34098 -31438 DB number of the parameter DBs too high. (Write job)
853A 34106 -31430 Parameter DB not present. (Write job)
8544 34116 -31420 Error at n-th (n > 1) read access to a DB after an error has
occurred. (Write job)
8723 34595 -30941 Channel DB or parameter DB too short. The data cannot be
written to the DB. (Read job)
8730 34608 -30928 Parameter DB in the CPU is write protected. The data cannot
be written to the DB (read job)
8732 34610 -30926 DB number of the parameter DBs too high (Read job)

FB 29 and FB 30
A.5 List of RET_VALU messages
JOB_ERR JOB_ERR JOB_ERR Meaning

(Hex) (Dec) (Int)
873A 34618 -30918 Parameter DB not present. (Read job)
8745 34629 -30907 Error at n-th (n > 1) write access to a DB after an error has
occurred. (Read job)
80ff 33023 -32513 Incorrect index specification with block FMT_PAR
Errors 80A2..80A4 and 80Cx are temporary, i.e. after a waiting period they can be eliminated without
any action on your part. Messages of the 7xxx form indicate temporary operating states of
communication.

B Data Sheet B
B.1 B.1 Technical Specifications S7-300
General technical specifications

General technical specifications are
• Electromagnetic compatibility
• Shipping and storage conditions
• Mechanical and climatic environmental conditions
• Specifications for insulation tests, protection class and degree of protection
These general technical specifications are explained in Manual /1/. They contain standards
and test values that the S7-300 fulfils and the criteria used to test the S7-300.
Approbations
The S7-300 has the following approvals:
UL Recognition Mark
Underwriters Laboratories (UL) in accordance with Standard UL 508
CSA-Certification-Mark
Canadian Standard Association (CSA) to Standard C22.2 No. 142
FM approval complying with Factory Mutual Approval Standard Class Number 3611, Class I,
Division 2, Group A, B, C, D
Warning
Personal injury and material damage may be incurred.
In potentially explosive environments, there is a risk of injury or damage if you disconnect
any connectors while the S7-300 is in operation.
Always isolate the S7-300 operated in such areas before you disconnect and connectors.

Operating Instructions, Edition 02/2006, A5E00059344-03 B-1
Data Sheet
B.1 Technical Specifications S7-300
Warning
DO NOT DISCONNECT WHILE CIRCUIT IS LIVE UNLESS LOCATION IS KNOWN TO BE
NONHAZARDOUS
CE Marking
Our products fulfill the requirements of the EU Directive 89/336/EEC ”Electromagnetic
compatibility”.
The EU conformity certificates are available for the relevant authorities and are kept at the
following address in accordance with the above-mentioned EU Directive. Article 10:
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft
Bereich Automatisierungs- und Antriebstechnik
A&D AS RD ST PLC
Postfach 1963
D-92209 Amberg
Area of Application
SIMATIC products are designed for use in industrial environments.
SIMATIC products may be also used in combination with an individual license in residential
areas (residential, commercial and industrial areas, small enterprises).
Area of application Requirements in respect of

Emitted interference Interference immunity
Industry EN 50081-2 : 1993 EN 50082-2 : 1995
Observe the Installation Guidelines

SIMATIC products fulfill the requirement if you observe the installation guidelines described
in the manuals during installation and operation.

B-2 Operating Instructions, Edition 02/2006, A5E00059344-03
Data Sheet
B.2 Technical Specifications FM 355
B.2 B.2 Technical Specifications FM 355
Technical Specifications of the FM 355
Dimensions and Weight

Dimensions
W x H x D (mm) 80 x 125 x 120
Weight Approx. 470 g
Module-Specific Data
Number of digital inputs 8
Number of digital outputs 8 (only step controller)
Number of analog inputs 4
Number of analog outputs 4 (only continuous-action controller)
Length of cable
• Digital signals unshielded Max. 600 m
• Digital signals shielded Max. 1000 m
• Analog signals shielded 200 m
50 m at 80 mV and thermocouples
Voltages, Currents, Potentials
Rated load voltage L+ 24 V DC
• Permitted range 20.4 to 28.8 V
• Polarity reversal protection for input supply Yes
• Polarity reversal protection for output supply Yes
Number of digital inputs that can be triggered

simultaneously
• Horizontal mounting 8
up to 60°C
• Vertical mounting 8
up to 40°C
Total current of the digital outputs
• Horizontal mounting
up to 40°C max. 0.4 A
• Vertical mounting
Electrical isolation
• To the backplane bus Yes (optocoupler)
• Between the channels No
Permissible potential difference
• Between input (M terminal) and central grounding 75 V DC,
point 60 V AC
• Between the analog inputs and MANA (UCM) 2.5 V DC
– At signal = 0 V 500 V DC
• Insulation tested with

Data Sheet
Current consumption
• From the backplane bus Typ. 50 mA, max. 75 mA
• From L+ (no load)
– Continuous-action controller Typ. 260 mA, max. 310 mA
Typ. 220 mA, max. 270 mA
– Step controller
Power dissipation of the module
• Continuous-action controller typ. 6.5 W, max. 7.8 W
• Step controller typ. 5.5 W, max. 6.9 W
Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics
Status display Yes, green LED per digital input channel
Interrupts
• Limit value interrupt yes, configurable
• Diagnostics interrupt yes, configurable
Diagnostic functions Yes, configurable
• Fault indication on the module in the event of a Yes, red LED
group fault
• Reading diagnostic information Yes
Backup operation Yes display through yellow LED
Interference Suppression, Error Limits (Inputs)
Interference voltage suppression for f = n x (f1 ± 1 %),
(f1 = interference frequency)
• Common-mode noise (Vpp < 2.5 V) > 70 dB
• Series-mode interference (peak value of disturbance > 40 dB
< rated input range)
Crosstalk between the inputs
• At 50 Hz 50 dB
• At 60 Hz 50 dB
Operational error limits (across the temperature range,
referenced to the input range)
• 80 mV ±1%
• 250 mV to 1000 mV ± 0,6 %
• From 2.5 V to 10 V ± 0,8 %
• 3.2 mA to 20 mA ± 0,7 %
Basic error limit (operational limit at 25°C, referenced to
input range)
• 80 mV ± 0,6 %
• 250 mV to 1000 mV ± 0,4 %
• From 2.5 V to 10 V ± 0,6 %
± 0,5 %
• 3.2 mA to 20 mA
Temperature error (referenced to the input range) ±0.005%/K
Linearity error (referenced to the input range) ± 0,05 %
Repeat accuracy (in transient state at 25°C, referenced ± 0,05 %
to input range)

Data Sheet
Interference Suppression, Error Limits (Outputs)

Crosstalk between the outputs 40 dB
Operational error limit (in the entire temperature range,
referenced to the output range)
• Voltage ± 0,5 %
• Current ± 0,6 %
Basic error limit (operational limit at 25°C, referenced to
output range)
• Voltage ± 0,4 %
• Current ± 0,5 %
Temperature error (referenced to output range) ± 0.02 %/K
Linearity error (referenced to output range) ± 0,05 %
Repeat accuracy (in transient state at 25°C, referenced ± 0,05 %
to output range)
Output ripple; range 0 kHz to 50 kHz (referenced to ± 0,05 %
output range)
Data for Selecting a Sensor (Digital Inputs)
Input voltage
• Rated value DC 24 V
• For signal "1" from 13 to 30 V
• For signal "0" from –3 to 5 V
Input current
• At signal "1" Typ. 7 mA
Input delay time
• Configurable no
• At "0" to "1" from 1.2 to 4.8 ms
• At "1" to "0" from 1.2 to 4.8 ms
Input characteristics To IEC 1131, Type 2

Connection of 2-wire BEROs Possible
• Permissible quiescent current ≤ 1.5 mA
Data for Selecting a Sensor (Analog Inputs)
Input ranges rated values (display range) / input impedance
• Voltage ** ± 80 mV (–80 to +80 mV)*** /10 MΩ
0 to 10 V (–1.175 to 11.75 V) /100 kΩ
• Current ** 0 to 20 mA (–3.5 to 23.5mA) /50 Ω *
4 to 20 mA (0 to 23.5 mA) /50 Ω *
• Thermocouple type ** B (0 to 13.81 mV) [42.15°C to 1820.01°C] /10 MΩ
J (-8.1 to 69.54 mV) [–210.02°C to 1200.02°C] /10 MΩ
K (–6.45 to 54.88 mV) [–265.40°C to 1372.11°C] /10 MΩ
R (–0.23 to 21.11 mV) [–51.37°C to 1767.77°C] /10 MΩ
S (–0.24 to 18.7 mV) [–50.40°C to 1767.98°C] /10 MΩ

Data Sheet
• Resistance Pt 100, current 1.667 mA pulsed: /10 MΩ

thermometer ** (30,82 ... 650.46 mV) –200.01 ... 850.05 °C
(single resolution)
(30,82 ... 499.06 mV) –200.01°C to 556.26°C
(double resolution)
(30,82 ... 254.12 mV) –200.01°C to 129.20°C
(fourfold resolution)
* External measuring resistor

** The same limits apply for underflow and overflow indication as for the indication
range. Exception: Underflow indication at 4 to 20 mA: 1 at < 3.6 mA; 0 at > 3.8 mA.
In the case of a wire break the underflow display shows between 4 and 20 mA.
*** Or the lower or upper input value respectively of the polygon. The lower value
applies.
Further data for selecting a sensor (analog inputs)

Permissible input voltage for voltage input (destruction 30 V (for a maximum of 2 inputs)
limit)
Permissible input current at current input (destruction 40 mA
limit)
Connection of signal sensors
• For voltage measurement Possible
• For current measurement as four-wire measuring Possible
transducers
Characteristics linearization Yes, configurable
• For thermocouples Type B, J, K, R, S
• For thermoresistors Pt 100 (standard range)
Temperature compensation Yes, configurable
• Internal temperature compensation Possible
• External temperature compensation with Pt 100 Possible
Data for Selecting an Actuator (Digital Outputs)
Output voltage
• At signal "1" Min. L+ (–2.5 V)
Output current
• Rated value at Signal "1" 0.1 A
permissible range From 5 mA to 0.15 A
• Leakage current at "0" signal Max. 0.5 mA
Load impedance range 240 Ω to 4 kΩ
Output power
• Lamp load Max. 5 W
Connection in parallel of two outputs
• For logic operation Possible
• For performance increase not possible
Controlling of a digital input Possible

Data Sheet

Switching frequency
• At resistive load/lamp load Max. 100 Hz
• At inductive load Max. 0.5 Hz
Internal limiting of the inductive shutdown voltage to Typ. L+ (–1.5 V)
Short-circuit protection of the output Yes, electronic
Actuator selection data (Digital outputs)
Output ranges ± 10 V
(Rated values) from 0 to 10 V
from 0 to 20 mA
from 4 to 20 mA
Load resistance
• At voltage outputs min. 1 kΩ
– Capacitive load max. 1 µF
• At current outputs max. 500 Ω
max. 1 mH
– Inductive load
Voltage output
• Short-circuit protection Yes
• Short-circuit current Max. 25 mA
Current output
• Open-circuit voltage Max. 18 V
Connection of actuators
• At voltage output with 2-wire connection Possible
• At current output with 2-wire connection Possible
Analog Value Generation
Measuring principle Integrating
Resolution (incl. overrange) Configurable:
12 bits
14 bits
Conversion time (per analog input)
• At 12 bits resolution 16 2/3 ms (at 60 Hz)
• At 12 bits resolution 20 ms (at 50 Hz)
• At 14 bits resolution 100 ms (at 50 and 60 Hz)
Settling time
• For resistive load 0.2 ms
• For capacitive load 3.3 ms
• For inductive load 0.5 ms
Input of substitution values Yes, configurable

Time per channel Integration time Conversion time Resolution
• Configurable
• Integration time 162/3 ms 20 ms 100 ms
• Basic conversion time incl. processing time 17 ms 22 ms 102 ms
• Additional conversion time for resistance 1 ms 1 ms 1 ms
measurement
• Additional conversion time for reference junction 162/3 ms 20 ms 100 * ms
input

Data Sheet

• Resolution in bits (including overshoot range) 12 12 14
measuring range
• Interference voltage suppression at interference 60 50 50, 60
frequency f1 in Hz
* Applies if a resolution of 14 bits is configured at at least one input.

Data Sheet
B.3 Technical Specifications of Function Blocks
B.3 B.3 Technical Specifications of Function Blocks
Technical Specifications of the Function Blocks
Table B-1 Technical specifications of the function blocks
Function Assignment in Processing time in

blocks
RAM Load memory Local data CPU 314 CPU 414
area
PID_FM 1592 bytes 1976 bytes 40 bytes Refer to following table
FORCE355 630 bytes 790 bytes 52 bytes 2.2 ms 2.0 ms
READ_355 526 bytes 644 bytes 66 bytes 2.5 ms 2.2 ms
CH_DIAG 302 bytes 420 bytes 64 bytes 2.3 ms 2.1 ms
FUZ_355 356 bytes 464 bytes 22 bytes 2.1 ms 1.9 ms
PID_PAR 918 bytes 1074 bytes 24 bytes 4.3 to 8 ms 3.8 to 7.2 ms
Depending on whether INDEX_R
and INDEX_I are both ≠ 0
CJ_T_PAR 274 bytes 354 bytes 22 bytes 1.8 ms 1.6 ms
Table B-2 Processing times of the PID_FM at various conditions
Conditions Processing time in

READ_VAR LOAD_OP LOAD_PAR CPU 314 CPU 414-2 DP
FALSE FALSE FALSE 0.65 ms 0.077 ms
TRUE FALSE FALSE 2.85 ms 2.36 ms
*) TRUE FALSE 4.56 ms 4.48 ms
FALSE FALSE TRUE 3.75 ms 2.59 ms
TRUE FALSE TRUE 5.95 ms 5.15 ms
*) TRUE TRUE 7.66 ms 7.1 ms
*) If LOAD_OP = TRUE, READ_VAR is also set to TRUE by the PID_FM FB.
Table B-3 Technical specifications of the instance DBs
Instance DBs of the function Assignment in

blocks ...
RAM Load memory
PID_FM 190 bytes 490 bytes
FORCE355 64 bytes 214 bytes
READ_355 78 bytes 184 bytes
CH_DIAG 72 bytes 178 bytes
FUZ_355 80 bytes 172 bytes
PID_PAR 290 bytes 410 bytes
CJ_T_PAR 58 bytes 130 bytes

Data Sheet
B.4 Technical Data of Parameter Configuration Interface
B.4 B.4 Technical Data of Parameter Configuration Interface
Parameter Configuration Interface
Technical specifications Parameter configuration interface

Required memory (hard disk) 4 Mbytes
Technical specifications System data

Required memory in the CPU 1258 bytes

C Spare Parts C
C.1 C.1 Spare Parts
Spare Parts
The following table lists all spare parts of the S7-300 that you can order for the FM 355 either
additionally or later.
Table C-1 Accessories and spare parts
S7-300 parts Order No.:

Bus connector 6ES7 390-0AA00-0AA0
Label sheet 6ES7 392-2XX00-0AA0
Slot number label 6ES7 912-0AA00-0AA0
Screw-type front connector (20-pin) 6ES7 392-1AJ00-0AA0
Shield contact element (with 2 screw-type 6ES7 390-5AA00-0AA0
bolts)
Shield terminals for
• 2 cables, each with a shield diameter of 2 6ES7 390-5AB00-0AA0
to 6 mm
• 1 cable with a shield diameter of 3 to
6ES7 390-5BA00-0AA0
8 mm
• 1 cable with a shield diameter of 4 to
13 mm 6ES7 390-5CA00-0AA0

Operating Instructions, Edition 02/2006, A5E00059344-03 C-1
Spare Parts
C.1 Spare Parts

C-2 Operating Instructions, Edition 02/2006, A5E00059344-03
D References D
D.1 D.1 References
Supplementary References
The table below lists all the manuals referred to in this manual.
No. Title Order No.:

/1/ SIMATIC S7; S7-300 Programmable Controller; 6ES7 398-8AA03-8AA0
Hardware and Installation
/2/ SIMATIC; System Software for S7-300 and S7-400 Belongs to Package
System and Standard Functions 6ES7 810-4CA04-8AR0
Basics
The basics of control technology can be found, for example, in the following books:
Title Author Order No.:

"Vom Prozeß zur Regelung" Gißler/Schmid A19100-L531-F196
(From a process to a control ISBN 3-8009-1551-0
system)
"Regeln mit SIMATIC S5 Siemens E80850-C331-X-A2
Grundlagen" (Basic principles of
controlling with SIMATIC S5)

Operating Instructions, Edition 02/2006, A5E00059344-03 D-1
References
D.1 References

D-2 Operating Instructions, Edition 02/2006, A5E00059344-03
Glossary
Cascade control
The cascade control is a consecutive switching of controllers, whereupon the first controller
(master controller) specifies the setpoint for the series-connected controllers (secondary
controllers) or influences the setpoints in accordance with the current negative deviation of
the main control variable.
By involving additional process variables, the controller result can be improved by using a
cascade control. To do this, at a suitable point an auxiliary control variable PV2 is recorded
and this controls the reference setpoint (output of the master controller SP2). The master
controller controls the process value PV1 on the fixed setpoint SP1 and adjusts the SP2 in
such a way that this objective is achieved as quickly as possible, and without overshooting.
Configuration
Tool (software) for creating and configuring a control as well as for optimizing the controller
with the aid of the data gained from a section identification.
Control device
Totality of the controller, control device and detector (measuring device) for the control
variable.
A control device is the part of the control circuit that serves to influence the control variable
on the process input. Usually consists of the association of the control drive and actuator.
Control device
Totality of the controller, control device and detector (measuring device) for the control
variable.
A control device is the part of the control circuit that serves to influence the control variable
on the process input. Usually consists of the association of the control drive and actuator.
Control loop
With the control loop you describe a connection of the section output (control variable) with
the controller input and the controller output (manipulated variable) with the process input, so
that the controller and process form a closed loop.
Control variable
Process variable (output variable of the control section) that is to be compared to the current
value of the reference variable. Your current value is called the process value.

Operating Instructions, Edition 02/2006, A5E00059344-03 Glossary-1
Glossary
Controlled system
With a controlled system we describe the part of the unit in which the control variable is
influenced by the manipulated variable (by changing the control energy or the flow
dimension). This enables subdivisions in the control device and the influenced process.
Controller
A controller is a device that constantly records the negative deviation (comparer) and, if
necessary generates a time-dependent function to form the control signal (output variable)
with the objective of iradicating the negative deviation as quickly as possible and without
overshooting.
Controller parameters
Controller parameters are parameters for the static and dynamic adaptation of the controller
behavior to the given section or process properties.
D part (derivative component)

The D part is the derivative component of the controller. D elements alone are unsuitable for
controlling, as they do not issue an output signal when setting the input variables to a stead
value.
Dead time
Dead time is the time delay for the control variable reaction to disturbances or changes to
the manipulated variable for transportation processes. The input variable of a dead time
element is set to the value of the dead time 1 : 1 is issued on the output.
Digital control (sample controlling) (digital control)

Controller that records a new value for the control variable (process value) at constant
intervals 〈→ sampling time, and then, in dependence on the actual negative deviation,
calculates a new value for the manipulated variable.
Disturbance variable
All influence variables on the control variable - with the exception of the manipulated variable
- are called disturbance variables. Additive influences on the section output signal can be
compensated for by superimposing with the actuating signal.
Disturbance variable compensation

The disturbance variable compensation is a procedure for reducing / removing the influence
of a dominating (measurable) disturbance variable (e.g. external temperature) on the control
circuit. A corrective operation is derived from the measured disturbance variable DISV, so
that changes to the DISV can be reacted to more quickly. In the ideal case scenario, the
influence is fully compensated for without the controller itself having to execute a corrective
process (via the I part).

Glossary-2 Operating Instructions, Edition 02/2006, A5E00059344-03
Glossary
Fixed setpoint control

A fixed setpoint control is a control with a fixed, only rarely changing reference variable.
Controls any disturbance variables that occur during the process.
Follow-up control
Follow-up control is a control where the reference value is constantly influenced from outside
(underlaid controller of a multi-loop control). The task of the follow-up controller is to cover
the local control variable with the reference variable as quickly and precisely as possible.
I part (integral component)

Integral component of the controller. After a jump-like change to the control variable (or
negative deviation), the output variable changes ramp-like over the time, and at a rate of
change that is proportionate to the integrated gain KI (= 1/TI). In a closed control loop the
integral part adjusts the controller output variable until the negative deviation becomes zero.
Limit alarm monitor

Algorithm (function) for monitoring an analog variable for four specified limits. When reaching
or exceeding / falling short of these limits, an associated warning (1st limit) or alarm signal
(2nd limit) is generated. To prevent signal flicker the disable threshold (switch-back
difference) of the limit signals can be set via a parameter for the hysteresis.
Limiter
Algorithm (function) for restricting the value range of constant variables to specified lower /
upper limit values.
Manipulated value correction

The manipulated value correction prevents a step change at the manipulated value during
the changeover from manual to automatic mode. The manipulated value remains unchanged
during the changeover from manual to automatic mode.
Manipulated variable
The manipulated variable is the output variable of the controller or input variable of the
control section. The actuating signal can portray the range of the manipulated variable
analogously as a percentage or as a impulse value or pulse width. With integrated actuators
(e.g. motor) it is sufficient to provide binary upwards / downwards or forwards / backwards
switching signals.
Mixing control
The mixing control is a control structure whereby the setpoint for the entire quantity SP is
calculated as a percentage of the desired number of parts of the individual controlled
components. The total of the mixing factors FAC must be 1 (= 100%).

Glossary
Negative deviation
The negative deviation is a function to form the negative deviation ER = SP-PV. At the
reference junction, the difference between the desired setpoint and the actual existing
process value is formed. This value is transmitted to the control algorithm as an input. Old
description: Control deviation.
P controller (P algorithm)
Algorithm for calculating an output signal whereby characteristics exist with a proportionate
connection between the negative deviation and the change in manipulated variable:
remaining negative deviation, not to be used on dead time sections.
Parallel structure
The parallel structure is a special kind of signal processing in the controller (type of
mathematical processing). The P, I and D parts are calculated as interaction-free and
parallel and are then added up.
Physical standardization
→ standardization
PI controller (PI algorithm)

Algorithm for calculating an output signal where the change to the manipulated variable is
made up from a part proportionate to the negative deviation and from an I part which is
proportionate to the value of the negative deviation and the time. Features: no remaining
negative deviation, quicker controlling than that with the I controller, suitable for all sections.
PID controller (PID algorithm)

Algorithm for calculating an output signal that is formed by the multiplication, integration and
differentiation of the negative deviation. The PID algorithm is designed as a purely parallel
structure. Feature: greater quality of control can be achieved, provided the dead time of the
control section is not greater than the total of the remaining time constants.
Process identification
The process identification is a function of the configuration tool. It provides information
regarding the transmission behavior and the structure of the process. A device-independent
process model is conveyed as a result - this describes the process in its static and dynamic
behavior. Optimum values for the controller parameters are calculated from this (controller
design).

Glossary
Process value
The current value of the control variable is PV
Ratio control
• single-loop ratio control
A single-loop ratio control is employed if the ratio of two control variables is more important
for a process than the absolute values of the control variables (e.g. speed regulation).
• multiple-loop ratio control

With a multiple-loop ratio control the relationship of the two process variables PV1 and
PV2 is kept constant. To do this, the setpoint of the 2nd control circuit is calculated from
the control variable of the 1st control circuit. Even with a dynamic change to the process
variable PV1 it is ensured that the specified relationship is maintained.
Reference variable
The reference variable specifies the desired value or course of the process variables of
interest. Your current value is → setpoint (SP).
Section
→ control section
Setpoint
The setpoint is the value that the control variable should adopt from the effects of a
controller.
Square root
→ square root extraction
Square root extraction

With the square root function SQRT quadratic associations can be linearized.
Standardization
The standardization is a procedure (algorithm) for converting (standardizing) the physical
values of a process variable into the (internally processed) percentage value of the control
and then converting the other way round to the output. The standardization line is
established by the start value and the end value.

Glossary
Step and pulse controller

The step and pulse controller is a virtually constant controller with two binary output signals.
The step controller serves to drive the integrated elements (e.g. step motor for opening and
closing a valve). The pulse controller serves to drive the non-integrated elements (e.g.
switching a heating on or off).
Three step controller

Controller with which the output variable can accept only three discreet states: e.g. "hot - off -
cool" or "right - standstill - left."

Index
Anti reset wind-up, 3-18
Application example
A Diagnosis, 13-10
FM 355 C, 13-6
Action mechanisms, 3-30
Applications
Activated state, 5-10
FM 355, 1-4
Actual value
Approbation, B-1
Conditioning, 3-14
Approval, B-1
Signal selection, 3-13
CSA, B-1
Actuators
FM, B-1
Connecting to analog output, 10-13
UL, B-1
Connecting to digital output, 10-15
Adapting
Analog inputs to line frequency, 3-5
Analog inputs to sensors, 3-5
B
Address Backup mode, 3-40
Start addresses, 4-1 Basic parameters, 3-4
Addressing Basic structure
Fixed address, 4-2 355, 3-1
Free Address, 4-2 Block diagram
Analog input FM 355 C, 3-2
Connecting measuring transducers, 10-2 FM 355 S, 3-3
Analog inputs Bus connector, 4-3
Adapting to line frequency, 3-5 Bus connectors, 1-6
Adapting to sensors, 3-5
Block diagram, 3-5, 9-5
Connection diagram, 9-4 C
For Pt100, 1-3
Cables
Number, 1-3
Cross-section, 5-8
Properties, 9-3
Selecting, 5-8
Analog output
Cascade control, 3-14
Connecting loads/actuators, 10-13
Example, 13-11
Analog outputs
CE
Block diagram, 9-8
Marking, iv, B-2
Connection diagram, 9-7
Certification, iv
Number, 1-3
CH_DIAG
Properties, 9-6
Displayed values, 7-20
Purpose, 7-20
Signal type, 3-28
CH_DIAG FB
Analog outputs of the FM 355 C, 3-28
Analog signal
Instance DB, 11-28
Cables, 5-8
Purpose, 7-20
Corruption, 10-1
Changeover
Lines for, 10-1, 10-13
Manual/automatic, 3-18
Shield, 5-8
Changing controller parameters, 7-2
Analog value conditioning, 3-6

Operating Instructions, Edition 02/2006, A5E00059344-03 Index-1
Index
Via the OP, 7-6 Controlled system

Via the PID_FM FB, 7-5 Characteristic values, 2-1
Channel number Critical/non-critical, 3-41
Entering in DB, 7-2, 7-20, 7-23, 7-29 Optimize, 8-3
Channels Controlled systems
Number, 1-3 Types, 2-14
Characteristic values Controller
for temperature controlled system, 2-3 Cascade option, 3-37
CJ_T_PAR Continuous-action, 1-1
Purpose, 7-29 self-tuning, 1-2
CJ_T_PAR FB Step and pulse controller, 1-1
Instance DB, 11-33 Type, 3-8
Purpose, 7-29 Controller module
Coil circuiting, 5-7 Properties, 3-35
Commissioning Controller module inputs, 3-4
Creating an instance DB, 8-3 Controller output, 3-21
HW installation and wiring, 8-1 Analog output, 3-23
Inserting FM 355 into project, 8-2 Continuous-action controller, 3-21
Parameter configuration, 8-2 Functions, 3-26
Saving the project, 8-4 Step controller with/without a position feedback
Setting up a new project, 8-2 signal, 3-25
Compensation Step controller, pulse mode, 3-23
Configured, 10-7 Controller parameters
External, 10-7 Saving in EEPROM, 7-7
of the reference junction temperature, 3-6 Controllers
Reference junction temperature, 10-6 Structure, 3-8
Configuring, 4-1 Controllers of the FM 355, 3-1
Hardware, 6-2 CPU stop, 3-40
Connecting CSA approval, B-1
Connecting loads/actuators to analog output, 10-
13
Four-wire measuring transducer:, 10-1 D
Measuring transducers at analog input, 10-2
Data management, 3-30
Two-wire measuring transducer, 10-1
Dead band, 3-20
Voltage sensor, 10-1
Dead time, 3-37
Connecting to digital output
Determining
Loads/Actuators, 10-15
System parameters for 2-/3-step controllers, 2-
Connection assignment, 1-6
18
Connector assignment
System parameters for cooling controllers, 2-21
FM 355 C, 5-2
Time response from step response, 2-1
FM 355 S, 5-4
Determining the controller parameters
Continuous-action controller, 1-1
Example, 2-20
Control algorithm
Diagnostic data record, 12-2
Block diagram, 3-15
Diagnostic interrupt
PID-action controller, 3-16
Default setting, 12-2
Control method
Definition, 12-2
Fuzzy controller, 1-2
enable, 12-2
PID controller, 1-2
OB 82, 12-2
Control parameters, 11-20, 11-42, 11-52
trigger, 12-1, 12-2
Control response, 2-7
Diagnostic LEDs
Selection, 2-14
Meaning, 1-7
Control structures
Diagnostics interrupt, 1-3
FM 355, 1-2
Diagnostics record, 12-3
Control tasks, 1-4

Index-2 Operating Instructions, Edition 02/2006, A5E00059344-03
Index
Diagnostics record DS0 Example application

Assignment, 12-3 FM x55 S, 13-1
Diagnostics record DS1 Example program
Assignment, 12-4 Application, 13-2, 13-6
Diagnostics text, 12-3 External errors, 12-1
Differential input
Digital inputs F
Cables, 5-8
Fields of application
Input filters, 5-6
FM 355, 1-4
Number, 1-3
Filters, 3-6
Operating modes, 3-7
Firmware update, 3-40
Properties, 9-1
FM
Shield, 5-8
Approval, B-1
Wiring and block diagrams, 9-2
FM 355
Digital outputs, 5-6
Applications, 1-4
Connecting loads/actuators, 10-15
Basic structure, 3-1
Number, 1-3
Control structures, 1-2
of the FM 355 S, 3-29
Hardware, 1-5
Properties, 9-1
Inserting in project, 8-2
Wiring and block diagrams, 9-2
Installation, 4-3
Direction of control action, 3-17
Installing on a mounting rail, 4-3
Disturbance variable
Module view, 1-5
Operating Modes, 1-2
Disturbance variable compensation, 3-16
Order Numbers, 1-1
Parameter configuration, 3-30
Removing, 4-3
E Replacing a module, 4-3
Error Rules for operation, 3-37
external, 12-1 S7-400 configuration, 1-9
Internal, 12-1 Software, 1-8
Error display, 12-1 Technical specifications, B-3
Establish Variants, 1-1
Section parameters (empirically), 2-23 FM 355 C
Example Analog outputs, 3-28
Cascade control, 13-11 Application example, 13-6
Determining the controller parameters, 2-20 Block diagram, 3-2
Mixed control, 13-13 Front connectors, 5-1
Ratio control, 13-12 Interconnection possibilities, 3-2
Example APP_1 FM 355 hardware, 1-5
Application, 13-2 FM 355 S
Block structure, 13-3 Block diagram, 3-3
Functionality, 13-2 digital outputs, 3-29
Parameterization, 13-4 Front connectors, 5-3
Parameters of the system model, 13-4 Interconnection possibilities, 3-3
Step response of the control loop, 13-5 FM approval, B-1
Example APP_2 FM x55 S
Application, 13-6 Example application, 13-1
Block structure, 13-7 Followup, 3-26
Functionality, 13-7 FORCE355
Parameterization, 13-8 Purpose, 7-16
Parameters of the system model, 13-8 Simulation of analog values, 7-16
Step response of the control loop, 13-9 Simulation of digital values, 7-17

Index
FORCE355 FB Possible problems, 3-44

Instance DB, 11-23 Preconditions, 3-43
Purpose, 7-16 Starting, 3-43
Simulation of analog values, 7-16 State, 3-44
Simulation of digital values, 7-17 IDSTATUS, 3-44
Four-wire measuring transducer IDSTATUS controller state, 3-44
Connecting, 10-1, 10-11 Input delay, 5-6
Front connector coding, 1-6 Input filters, 5-6
Front connector FM 355 C Inputs of the FM 355, 3-1
Connector assignment, 5-2 installing
View, 5-1 FM 355 on mounting rail, 4-3
Front connector FM 355 S Installing
Connector assignment, 5-4 FM 355, 4-3
View, 5-3 Parameter setting interface, 6-1
Front connectors Installing and removing the FM 355, 4-3
Connection possibilities, 1-6 Instance DB
Order, 1-6 CH_DIAG FB, 11-28
Wiring, 5-9 CJ_T_PAR FB, 11-33
Function block Creating, 8-3
Creating an instance DB, 7-20, 7-23, 7-29 Creating and supplying, 7-2, 7-14, 7-16, 7-18, 7-
Creatting an instance DB, 7-14, 7-16, 7-18 20, 7-23, 7-29
Function blocks For OP, 11-13, 11-35
for S7-300-CPU, 1-8 FORCE355 FB, 11-23
Overview, 7-1 FUZ_355 FB, 11-20
Technical specifications, B-9 PID_FM FB, 11-1, 11-25
FUZ_355 PID_PAR FB, 11-31
Purpose, 7-14 READ_355 FB, 11-26
using, 7-15 Integration time, 9-3
FUZ_355 FB Interconnection possibilities
Instance DB, 11-20 FM 355 C, 3-2
Purpose, 7-14 FM 355 S, 3-3
using, 7-15 Internal errors, 12-1
Interrupt, 3-14
G
L
Group error LED, 12-1
Labeling strips, 1-6
Limiting/Normalizing, 3-13
H Line frequency
Adapting, 3-5
Hardware
Lines
Configuring, 6-2
For analog signals, 10-1, 10-13
Hardware interrupts, 1-3
Loads
HW installation and wiring, 8-1
Connecting to analog output, 10-13, 10-14
Hysteresis for warning and interrupt limits, 3-14
Connecting to digital output, 10-15
I M
I control, 3-18
Manipulated value
Identification
At restart, 3-38
Cancel, 3-44
Limit, 3-26
Completion, 3-43
Switching of external, 3-26
of the controlled system, 3-42
Manipulated value correction, 3-21

Index
Manipulated value limit, 3-26 Order Numbers

Marking FM 355, 1-1
CE, iv, B-2 Outputs of the FM 355, 3-1
Measured value resolution, 9-3 Overvoltage protection, 5-6
Measuring range violation (overrange), 12-6
Measuring range violation (underrange), 12-6
Measuring transducer fault, 3-26, 12-6 P
Measuring transducers
P-action control, 3-17
at analog input, 10-2
P-action controller, 2-7
Connecting, 10-1
Parameter
Isolated, 10-2
Control parameters, 11-20, 11-42, 11-52
Non-isolated, 10-3
Operating parameters, 11-20, 11-42, 11-52
Mechanical design, 4-1
Parameter assignment, 6-2
Mixed control
Parameter configuration, 3-30, 8-2
Example, 13-13
Data flow, 3-31
Module
Parameter configuration data
Replacing (in FM 355), 4-3
Back up, 8-3
Module address
Transfer, 8-3
Entering in DB, 7-2, 7-14, 7-16, 7-18, 7-20, 7-23,
Parameter configuration interface, 1-8, 3-30
7-29
Technical specifications, B-10
Module view
Parameter optimization
FM 355, 1-5
Temperature controller, 3-42
Monitoring via the FB PID_FM, 7-3
Parameter setting interface
Mounting position, 4-1
installing, 6-1
MPI
Parameterization screens
Operator control and monitoring with OP, 3-33
integrated help, 6-3
Multiplication, 3-14
Parameters
downloading directly, 3-30
PD control, 3-18
N PD-action controller, 2-8
Negative deviation generation, 3-9 Time lag of the D-action, 3-19
Signal selection, 3-13 PD-action in feedback, 3-16
Normalizing/Limiting, 3-13 PI control, 3-18
PI-action controller, 2-10
PID_FM
O Action of the input parameters, 7-8
For monitoring, 7-3
OB 82
For operation, 7-3
Diagnostic interrupt, 12-2
Generating output parameters, 7-11
Online help, 1-8
Purpose, 7-2
OP
To change parameters, 7-5
Instance DB, 11-35
PID_FM FB
Operating modes
Action of the input parameters, 7-8
Digital inputs, 3-7
For monitoring, 7-3
FM 355, 1-2
For operation, 7-3
Operating parameters, 11-20, 11-42, 11-52
Generating output parameters, 7-11
Operating point for a P(D)-action controller:, 3-21
Instance DB, 11-1, 11-21
Operating via the FB PID_FM, 7-3
Parameters and parameter configuration
Operator control and monitoring
interface, 7-7
Via OP (assignment of the DBs), 11-35
Purpose, 7-2
Via PID_FM FB, 3-33
To change parameters, 7-5
with the OP, 3-33
PID_PAR
Order Number
Changeable parameters, 7-25
Information location, 1-6

Index
Changing values, 7-24 Resistance thermometer

Purpose, 7-23 Connecting, 10-12
PID_PAR FB Resolution, 3-6
Changeable parameters, 7-25 Measured value, 9-3
Changing values, 7-24 RET_VALU messages, A-15
Instance DB, 11-31 Reversing of the controller action, 3-17
Purpose, 7-23 Rules for operation, 3-37
PID-action control, 3-19
PID-action controller, 2-12
Control algorithm, 3-16 S
Controller structure, 3-16
S7-300-CPU
Dead band, 3-20
Function blocks, 1-8
Parameterization, 3-20
Safety manipulated value, 3-26
Polyline, 3-6
Safety rules, 4-2
Position feedback input, 3-26
Safety setpoint value, 3-13
Power supply
Sampling time, 3-36, 3-38
of the encoders, 5-5
Scanning time, 3-6
Program examples, 6-1
Section parameters
Properties
Empirically establishing, 2-23
Controller module, 3-35
Selecting
Pt100
Cables, 5-8
Connection to FM 355, 1-3
Self-tuning controller, 1-2
Pulse generator, 3-26
Sequence of execution, 3-35, 3-37
Setpoint
At restart, 3-38
Q Conditioning, 3-13
Q1 to Q8, 5-6 Signal selection, 3-13
Setting up a project
New, 8-2
R Shielding contact element, 5-9
Simulation
Ramp, 3-13
of analog values, 7-16
Ratio control
of digital values, 7-17
Example, 13-12
Slots
READ_355
Permissible, 4-1
Displayed values, 7-18, 7-22
Smooth changeover, 3-18
Purpose, 7-18
Software
READ_355 FB
of the FM 355, 1-8
Spare parts list, C-1
Instance DB, 11-26
Split-range function, 3-21
Purpose, 7-18
Continuous-action controller, 3-22
Readme file, 6-1
Three-step controllers, 3-23
Reference input, 9-3
Two-step controllers, 3-23
Reference junction, 1-3, 3-6, 3-35, 10-7
Split-range manipulated values, 3-26
at thermocouple, 10-6
Square root, 3-6
Reference junction input, 3-38
Standardization, 3-6
Reference junction temperature, 9-3, 10-6
Start addresses, 4-1
Compensation, 10-6
Startup behavior
Measurement, 10-6
At separate power supply, 3-38
Reference point, 10-1, 10-13
General, 3-38
References, D-1
Status LEDs
Removing
Meaning, 1-7
FM 355, 4-3
Step and pulse controller, 1-1
Removing the FM 355, 4-3

Index
Step controller, 1-1 Time lag of the D-action (TM_LAG), 3-19

Step response TM_LAG, 3-19
Time response from ~ determining, 2-1 Tracking input, 3-26
Supply voltage L+ M, 5-5 Two-step controllers
Switching Split-range function, 3-23
Temperature measurement, 3-6 With feedback, 2-5
System parameters Without feedback, 2-4
Determining for 2-/3-step controllers, 2-18 Two-wire measuring transducer
Determining for cooling controllers, 2-21 Connecting, 10-1, 10-11
T U
Technical specifications UL approval, B-1
FM 355, B-3 User program
Function blocks (FBs), B-9 Connection, 7-2
Parameter configuration interface, B-10
Temperature controlled systems
Important characteristic values, 2-3 V
Temperature controller, 3-15
Variants
Parameter optimization, 3-42
FM 355, 1-1
Requirements for process, 3-41
Version, 1-6
Temperature measurement
Voltage sensor
Celsius / Fahrenheit, 3-6
Connecting, 10-1, 10-10
Thermocouple, 10-5
Connecting, 10-7
Connection alternatives, 10-7
Method of operation, 10-6
W
Reference junction, 10-6 Wire breakage, 12-6
Structure, 10-5 Wire end ferrule, 5-8
Types, 10-5 Wiring
With configured compensation, 10-9 Front connectors, 5-9
With external compensation, 10-8 with the parameterization
Three-step controllers, 2-6, 3-24 What you should note, 6-3
Split-range function, 3-23

Index


FM 355 - PID Control

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

FM 355 - PID Control

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

FM 355 - PID Control

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Introduction

SIMATIC FM 355 closed-loop control module

Information for the controller

How Does the FM 355

Installing and Removing the

Implementing the FM 355 in

Properties of Digital and

Assignment of the Instance

This manual is part of the documentation package A

Siemens AG Order No.: A5E00059344-03 Copyright © Siemens AG 2006.

Purpose of This Manual

Contents of the Manual

Scope of This Manual

FM 355 closed-loop control module

FM 355 closed-loop control module

Position in the Information Landscape

FM 355 closed-loop control module

Nuremberg Johnson City Singapore

FM 355 closed-loop control module

FM 355 closed-loop control module

5 Wiring the FM 355 .................................................................................................................................. 5-1

FM 355 closed-loop control module

11.4 Instance DB of the READ_355 FB......................................................................................... 11-26

FM 355 closed-loop control module

FM 355 closed-loop control module

FM 355 closed-loop control module

FM 355 closed-loop control module

Variants of the FM 355

Product Scope of delivery Order Number

FM 355 closed-loop control module

1.2 1.2 Functionality of the FM 355

Control method Optimization by ...

FM 355 closed-loop control module

Number of Inputs and Outputs

Table 1-1 Inputs and outputs of the the FM 355

Inputs/Outputs FM 355 C FM 355 S

FM 355 closed-loop control module

1.3 1.3 Areas of Application for the FM 355

Where Can You Use the FM 355?

FM 355 closed-loop control module

1.4 1.4 FM 355 Hardware

Figure 1-1 FM 355 module view

① Front connector with front connector coding

FM 355 closed-loop control module

Front Connector Coding

Order Number and Version

FM 355 closed-loop control module

Diagnostics and Status LED's

Table 1-2 Diagnostics and Status LED's

Labeling Color Function

FM 355 closed-loop control module

1.5 1.5 FM 355 Software

Software Package of the FM 355

Parameter Configuration Interface

Software for the S7-300 CPU (Function Blocks)

FM 355 closed-loop control module

Figure 1-2 SIMATIC S7-300 configuration with an FM 355

FM 355 closed-loop control module

FM 355 closed-loop control module

+HDWLQJXSFXUYH &RROLQJGRZQFXUYH 7LPH

6WDUWSRLQW*$,1VPDOO 7'RUVPDOO7, 7' PHDQV3DWKLV